Project Gutenberg's The Earliest Arithmetics in English, by Anonymous

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
Title: The Earliest Arithmetics in English
Author: Anonymous
Editor: Robert Steele
Release Date: June 1, 2008 [EBook #25664]
Language: English
Character set encoding: UTF-8
*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE EARLIEST ARITHMETICS IN ENGLISH **
*

Produced by Louise Hope, David Starner and the Online

Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net

[Transcribers Note:
This e-text includes characters that will only display in UTF-8
(Unicode) text readers:
, (yogh, long s)
, (n with curl, crossed l: see below)
(Greek phi: see below)
(small raised w)
I any o these characters do not display properly, or i the
apostrophes and quotation marks in this paragraph appear as garbage,
make sure your text readers character set or ile encoding is set
to Unicode (UTF-8). You may also need to change the de ault ont.
In _The Cra te o Nombrynge_, inal n was sometimes written with an
extra curl. It has been rendered as or visual e ect; the character
is not intended to convey phonetic in ormation. In the same selection,
the numeral 0 was sometimes printed as Greek (phi); this has been
retained or the e-text. Double l with a line is shown as . The
irst ew occurrences o d ( or pence) were printed with a
decorative curl. The letter is shown with the same d used in the
remainder o the text.
The word withdraw or w{i}t{h}draw was inconsistently hyphenated;
it was le t as printed, and line-end hyphens were retained.
Superscripts are shown with carets as ^e. Except or [Illustration]

markers and similar, all brackets are in the original.

Individual letters were italicized to show expanded abbreviations; these
are shown in br{ac}es. Other italicized words are shown conventionally
with _lines_, bold ace with +marks+. When a ootnote called or added
text, the addition is shown in the body text with [[double brackets]].
The original text contained at least ive types o marginal note.
Details are given at the end o the e-text, ollowed by a listing o
typographical errors.]
*

*
*

*
*

*
*

*
*

The Earliest Arithmetics

in English
Early English Text Society.
Extra Series, No. CXVIII.
1922 ( or 1916).

THE EARLIEST ARITHMETICS

IN ENGLISH
Edited With Introduction
by
ROBERT STEELE
London:
Published or the Early English Text Society
By Humphrey Mil ord, Ox ord University Press,
Amen Corner, E.C. 4.
1922.

[Titles (list added by transcriber):

The Cra te o Nombrynge
The Art o Nombryng
Accomptynge by Counters
The arte o nombrynge by the hande
APP. I. A Treatise on the Numeration o Algorism
APP. II. Carmen de Algorismo]

INTRODUCTION
The number o English arithmetics be ore the sixteenth century is very
small. This is hardly to be wondered at, as no one requiring to use even
the simplest operations o the art up to the middle o the i teenth
century was likely to be ignorant o Latin, in which language there were
several treatises in a considerable number o manuscripts, as shown by
the quantity o them still in existence. Until modern commerce was
airly well established, ew persons required more arithmetic than
addition and subtraction, and even in the thirteenth century, scienti ic
treatises addressed to advanced students contemplated the likelihood o
their not being able to do simple division. On the other hand, the study
o astronomy necessitated, rom its earliest days as a science,
considerable skill and accuracy in computation, not only in the
calculation o astronomical tables but in their use, a knowledge o
which latter was airly common rom the thirteenth to the sixteenth
centuries.
The arithmetics in English known to me are:-(1) Bodl. 790 G. VII. (2653) . 146-154 (15th c.) _inc._ O angrym
ther be IX igures in numbray . . . A mere un inished ragment,
only getting as ar as Duplation.
(2) Camb. Univ. LI. IV. 14 (III.) . 121-142 (15th c.) _inc._
Al maner o thyngis that prosedeth ro the rist begynnyng . . .
(3) Fragmentary passages or diagrams in Sloane 213 . 120-3
(a ourteenth-century counting board), Egerton 2852 . 5-13,
Harl. 218 . 147 and
(4) The two MSS. here printed; Eg. 2622 . 136 and Ashmole 396
. 48. All o these, as the language shows, are o the i teenth
century.
The CRAFTE OF NOMBRYNGE is one o a large number o scienti ic
treatises, mostly in Latin, bound up together as Egerton MS. 2622 in
the British Museum Library. It measures 7 5, 29-30 lines to the
page, in a rough hand. The English is N.E. Midland in dialect. It is a
translation and ampli ication o one o the numerous glosses on the _de
algorismo_ o Alexander de Villa Dei (c. 1220), such as that o Thomas
o Newmarket contained in the British Museum MS. Reg. 12, E. 1.
A ragment o another translation o the same gloss was printed by
Halliwell in his _Rara Mathematica_ (1835) p. 29.[1*] It corresponds, as
ar as p. 71, l. 2, roughly to p. 3 o our version, and rom thence to
the end p. 2, ll. 16-40.
[Footnote 1*: Halliwell printed the two sides o his lea in the
wrong order. This and some obvious errors o transcription- erye or erthe, lest or le t, etc., have not been
corrected in the reprint on pp. 70-71.]
The ART OF NOMBRYNG is one o the treatises bound up in the Bodleian MS.
Ashmole 396. It measures 11 17, and is written with thirty-three
lines to the page in a i teenth century hand. It is a translation,
rather literal, with ampli ications o the _de arte numerandi_
attributed to John o Holywood (Sacrobosco) and the translator had
obviously a poor MS. be ore him. The _de arte numerandi_ was printed in
1488, 1490 (_s.n._), 1501, 1503, 1510, 1517, 1521, 1522, 1523, 1582, and

by Halliwell separately and in his two editions o

1839 and 1841, and reprinted by Curze in 1897.

_Rara Mathematica_,

Both these tracts are here printed or the irst time, but the irst
having been circulated in proo a number o years ago, in an endeavour
to discover other manuscripts or parts o manuscripts o it, Dr. David
Eugene Smith, misunderstanding the position, printed some pages in a
curious transcript with our acsimiles in the _Archiv r die
Geschichte der Naturwissenscha ten und der Technik_, 1909, and invited
the scienti ic world to take up the not unpleasant task o editing it.
ACCOMPTYNGE BY COUNTERS is reprinted rom the 1543 edition o Robert
Records Arithmetic, printed by R. Wol e. It has been reprinted within
the last ew years by Mr. F. P. Barnard, in his work on Casting
Counters. It is the earliest English treatise we have on this variety o
the Abacus (there are Latin ones o the end o the i teenth century),
but there is little doubt in my mind that this method o per orming the
simple operations o arithmetic is much older than any o the pen
methods. At the end o the treatise there ollows a note on merchants
and auditors ways o setting down sums, and lastly, a system o digital
numeration which seems o great antiquity and almost world-wide
extension.
A ter the ragment already re erred to, I print as an appendix the
Carmen de Algorismo o Alexander de Villa Dei in an enlarged and
corrected orm. It was printed or the irst time by Halliwell in
_Rara Mathemathica_, but I have added a number o stanzas rom various
manuscripts, selecting various readings on the principle that the verses
were made to scan, aided by the advice o my riend Mr. Vernon Rendall,
who is not responsible or the ew doubt ul lines I have conserved. This
poem is at the base o all other treatises on the subject in medieval
times, but I am unable to indicate its sources.
THE SUBJECT MATTER.
Ancient and medieval writers observed a distinction between the Science
and the Art o Arithmetic. The classical treatises on the subject, those
o Euclid among the Greeks and Boethius among the Latins, are devoted to
the Science o Arithmetic, but it is obvious that coeval with practical
Astronomy the Art o Calculation must have existed and have made
considerable progress. I early treatises on this art existed at all
they must, almost o necessity, have been in Greek, which was the
language o science or the Romans as long as Latin civilisation
existed. But in their absence it is sa e to say that no involved
operations were or could have been carried out by means o the
alphabetic notation o the Greeks and Romans. Specimen sums have indeed
been constructed by moderns which show its possibility, but it is absurd
to think that men o science, acquainted with Egyptian methods and in
possession o the abacus,[2*] were unable to devise methods or its use.
[Footnote 2*: For Egyptian use see Herodotus, ii. 36, Plato, _de
Legibus_, VII.]
THE PRE-MEDIEVAL INSTRUMENTS USED IN CALCULATION.
The ollowing are known:-(1) A lat polished sur ace or tablets, strewn with sand, on which

igures were inscribed with a stylus.

(2) A polished tablet divided longitudinally into nine columns (or more)
grouped in threes, with which counters were used, either plain or marked
with signs denoting the nine numerals, etc.
(3) Tablets or boxes containing nine grooves or wires, in or on which
ran beads.
(4) Tablets on which nine (or more) horizontal lines were marked, each
third being marked o .
The only Greek counting board we have is o the ourth class and was
discovered at Salamis. It was engraved on a block o marble, and
measures 5 eet by 2. Its chie part consists o eleven parallel lines,
the 3rd, 6th, and 9th being marked with a cross. Another section
consists o
ive parallel lines, and there are three rows o
arithmetical symbols. This board could only have been used with counters
(_calculi_), pre erably unmarked, as in our treatise o _Accomptynge by
Counters_.
CLASSICAL ROMAN METHODS OF CALCULATION.
We have proo o two methods o calculation in ancient Rome, one by the
irst method, in which the sur ace o sand was divided into columns by a
stylus or the hand. Counters (_calculi_, or _lapilli_), which were kept
in boxes (_loculi_), were used in calculation, as we learn rom Horaces
schoolboys (Sat. 1. vi. 74). For the sand see Persius I. 131, Nec qui
abaco numeros et secto in pulvere metas scit risisse, Apul. Apolog. 16
(pulvisculo), Mart. Capella, lib. vii. 3, 4, etc. Cicero says o an
expert calculator eruditum attigisse pulverem, (de nat. Deorum,
ii. 18). Tertullian calls a teacher o arithmetic primus numerorum
arenarius (de Pallio, _in ine_). The counters were made o various
materials, ivory principally, Adeo nulla uncia nobis est eboris, etc.
(Juv. XI. 131), sometimes o precious metals, Pro calculis albis et
nigris aureos argenteosque habebat denarios (Pet. Arb. Satyricon, 33).
There are, however, still in existence our Roman counting boards o a
kind which does not appear to come into literature. A typical one is o
the third class. It consists o a number o transverse wires, broken at
the middle. On the le t hand portion our beads are strung, on the right
one (or two). The le t hand beads signi y units, the right hand one ive
units. Thus any number up to nine can be represented. This instrument is
in all essentials the same as the Swanpan or Abacus in use throughout
the Far East. The Russian stchota in use throughout Eastern Europe is
simpler still. The method o using this system is exactly the same as
that o _Accomptynge by Counters_, the right-hand ive bead replacing
the counter between the lines.
THE BOETHIAN ABACUS.
Between classical times and the tenth century we have little or no
guidance as to the art o calculation. Boethius ( i th century), at the
end o lib. II. o his _Geometria_ gives us a igure o an abacus o the
second class with a set o counters arranged within it. It has, however,
been contended with great probability that the whole passage is a tenth
century interpolation. As no rules are given or its use, the chie
value o the igure is that it gives the signs o the nine numbers,

known as the Boethian apices or notae ( rom whence our word

notation). To these we shall return later on.
THE ABACISTS.
It would seem probable that writers on the calendar like Bede (A.D. 721)
and Helpericus (A.D. 903) were able to per orm simple calculations;
though we are unable to guess their methods, and or the most part they
were dependent on tables taken rom Greek sources. We have no early
medieval treatises on arithmetic, till towards the end o the tenth
century we ind a revival o the study o science, centring or us round
the name o Gerbert, who became Pope as Sylvester II. in 999. His
treatise on the use o the Abacus was written (c. 980) to a riend
Constantine, and was irst printed among the works o Bede in the Basle
(1563) edition o his works, I. 159, in a somewhat enlarged orm.
Another tenth century treatise is that o Abbo o Fleury (c. 988),
preserved in several manuscripts. Very ew treatises on the use o the
Abacus can be certainly ascribed to the eleventh century, but rom the
beginning o the twel th century their numbers increase rapidly, to
judge by those that have been preserved.
The Abacists used a permanent board usually divided into twelve columns;
the columns were grouped in threes, each column being called an arcus,
and the value o a igure in it represented a tenth o what it would
have in the column to the le t, as in our arithmetic o position. With
this board counters or jetons were used, either plain or, more probably,
marked with numerical signs, which with the early Abacists were the
apices, though counters rom classical times were sometimes marked on
one side with the digital signs, on the other with Roman numerals. Two
ivory discs o this kind rom the Hamilton collection may be seen at the
British Museum. Gerbert is said by Richer to have made or the purpose
o computation a thousand counters o horn; the usual number o a set o
counters in the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries was a hundred.
Treatises on the Abacus usually consist o chapters on Numeration
explaining the notation, and on the rules or Multiplication and
Division. Addition, as ar as it required any rules, came naturally
under Multiplication, while Subtraction was involved in the process o
Division. These rules were all that were needed in Western Europe in
centuries when commerce hardly existed, and astronomy was unpractised,
and even they were only required in the preparation o the calendar and
the assignments o the royal exchequer. In England, or example, when
the hide developed rom the normal holding o a household into the unit
o taxation, the calculation o the geldage in each shire required a sum
in division; as we know rom the act that one o the Abacists proposes
the sum: I 200 marks are levied on the county o Essex, which contains
according to Hugh o Bocland 2500 hides, how much does each hide
pay?[3*] Exchequer methods up to the sixteenth century were ounded on
the abacus, though when we have details later on, a di erent and
simpler orm was used.
[Footnote 3*: See on this Dr. Poole, _The Exchequer in the Twel th
Century_, Chap. III., and Haskins, _Eng. Hist. Review_, 27, 101.
The hidage o Essex in 1130 was 2364 hides.]
The great di iculty o the early Abacists, owing to the absence o a
igure representing zero, was to place their results and operations in
the proper columns o the abacus, especially when doing a division sum.
The chie di erences noticeable in their works are in the methods or

this rule. Division was either done directly or by means o di erences

between the divisor and the next higher multiple o ten to the divisor.
Later Abacists made a distinction between iron and golden methods o
division. The ollowing are examples taken rom a twel th century
treatise. In ollowing the operations it must be remembered that a
igure asterisked represents a counter taken rom the board. A zero is
obviously not needed, and the result may be written down in words.
(_a_) MULTIPLICATION. 4600 23.
+-----------+-----------+
| Thousands |
|
+---+---+---+---+---+---+
| H | T | U | H | T | U |
| u | e | n | u | e | n |
| n | n | i | n | n | i |
| d | s | t | d | s | t |
| r | | s | r | | s |
| e | | | e | | |
| d | | | d | | |
| s | | | s | | |
+---+---+---+---+---+---+
| | | 4 | 6 | | |
+---+---+---+---+---+---+
| | | 1 | 8 | | |
| | 1 | 2 | | | |
| | 1 | 2 | | | |
| | 8 | | | | |
+---+---+---+---+---+---+
| 1 | | 5 | 8 | | |
+---+---+---+---+---+---+
| | | | | 2 | 3 |
+---+---+---+---+---+---+

+Multiplicand.+
600
4000
600
4000

3.
3.
20.
20.

Total product.
+Multiplier.+

(_b_) DIVISION: DIRECT. 100,000 20,023. Here each counter in turn is a

separate divisor.
+-----------+-----------+
| Thousands |
|
+---+---+---+---+---+---+
| H.| T.| U.| H.| T.| U.|
+---+---+---+---+---+---+
| | 2 | | | 2 | 3 |
+---+---+---+---+---+---+
| | 2 | | | | |
| 1 | | | | | |
| | 2 | | | | |
| | | | 1 | | |
| | 1 | 9 | 9 | | |
| | | | | 8 | |
+---+---+---+---+---+---+
| | 1 | 9 | 9 | 2 | |
| | | | | 1 | 2 |
+---+---+---+---+---+---+
| | 1 | 9 | 9 | | 8 |
| | | | | | 4 |
+---+---+---+---+---+---+

+Divisors.+
Place greatest divisor to right o
+Dividend.+
Remainder.

dividend.

Another orm o same.

Product o 1st Quotient and 20.
Remainder.
Product o 1st Quotient and 3.
+Final remainder.+
Quotient.

(_c_) DIVISION BY DIFFERENCES. 900 8. Here we divide by (10-2).

+---+---+---+-----+---+---+
| | | | H. | T.| U.|
+---+---+---+-----+---+---+
| | | |
| | 2 |
| | | |
| | 8 |
+---+---+---+-----+---+---+
| | | |[4*]9| | |
| | | |[4*]1| 8 | |
| | | |
| 2 | |
+---+---+---+-----+---+---+
| | | |[4*]1| | |
| | | |
| 2 | |
| | | |
| | 4 |
| | | |
| | |
+---+---+---+-----+---+---+
| | | |
| | 2 |
| | | |
| 1 | |
| | | |
| 1 | |
| | | |
| 9 | |
+---+---+---+-----+---+---+
| | | | 1 | 1 | 2 |
+---+---+---+-----+---+---+

Di erence.
Divisor.
+Dividend.+
Product o di erence by 1st Quotient (9).
Product o di erence by 2nd Quotient (1).
Sum o 8 and 2.
Product o di erence by 3rd Quotient (1).
Product o di erence by 4th Quot. (2).
+Remainder.+
4th
3rd
2nd
1st

Quotient.
Quotient.
Quotient.
Quotient.

+Quotient.+ (+Total o

all our.+)

[Footnote 4*: These igures are removed at the next step.]

DIVISION. 7800 166.
+---------------+---------------+
| Thousands |
|
+----+----+-----+-----+----+----+
| H. | T. | U. | H. | T. | U. |
+----+----+-----+-----+----+----+
|
|
|
|
| 3 | 4 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 1 | 6 | 6 |
+----+----+-----+-----+----+----+
|
|
|[4*]7| 8 |
|
|
|
|
| 1 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 1 | 2 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 9 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
+----+----+-----+-----+----+----+
|
|
|[4*]2| 8 | 2 |
|
|
|
|
| 3 | 4 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
+----+----+-----+-----+----+----+
|
|
|[4*]1| 1 | 6 |
|
|
|
|
|
| 2 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 1 | 5 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
+----+----+-----+-----+----+----+
|
|
|
|[4*]3| 3 |
|
|
|
|
| 1 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 3 | 4 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
+----+----+-----+-----+----+----+
|
|
|
| 1 | 6 | 4 |
|
|
|
|
|
| 1 |

Di erences (making 200 trial

divisor).
Divisors.
+Dividends.+
Remainder o greatest dividend.
Product o 1st di erence (4)
by 1st Quotient (3).
Product o 2nd di erence (3)
by 1st Quotient (3).
New dividends.
Product o 1st and 2nd di erence
by 2nd Quotient (1).
New dividends.
Product o 1st
3rd Quotient
Product o 2nd
3rd Quotient

di erence by
(5).
di erence by
(5).

New dividends.
Remainder o greatest dividend.
Product o 1st and 2nd di erence
by 4th Quotient (1).
+Remainder+ (less than divisor).
4th Quotient.

|
|
|
|
|
| 5 |
|
|
|
|
| 1 |
|
|
|
|
|
| 3 |
|
+----+----+-----+-----+----+----+
|
|
|
|
| 4 | 6 |
+----+----+-----+-----+----+----+

3rd Quotient.
2nd Quotient.
1st Quotient.
+Quotient.+

[Footnote 4*: These igures are removed at the next step.]

DIVISION. 8000 606.
+-------------+-----------+
| Thousands |
|
+---+---+-----+---+---+---+
| H.| T.| U. | H.| T.| U.|
+---+---+-----+---+---+---+
| | |
| | 9 | |
| | |
| | | 4 |
| | |
| 6 | | 6 |
+---+---+-----+---+---+---+
| | |[4*]8| | | |
| | | 1 | | | |
| | |
| 9 | 4 | |
| | |
| | | |
+---+---+-----+---+---+---+
| | |[4*]1| 9 | 4 | |
| | |
| 3 | | |
| | |
| | 9 | 4 |
| | |
| | | |
+---+---+-----+---+---+---+
| | |[4*]1| 3 | 3 | 4 |
| | |
| 3 | | |
| | |
| | 9 | 4 |
| | |
| | | |
+---+---+-----+---+---+---+
| | |
| 7 | 2 | 8 |
| | |
| 6 | | 6 |
+---+---+-----+---+---+---+
| | |
| 1 | 2 | 2 |
| | |
| | | 1 |
| | |
| | | 1 |
| | |
| | | 1 |
| | |
| | 1 | |
+---+---+-----+---+---+---+
| | |
| | 1 | 3 |
+---+---+-----+---+---+---+

Di erence (making 700 trial divisor).

Di erence.
Divisors.
+Dividend.+
Remainder o dividend.
Product o di erence 1 and 2 with
1st Quotient (1).
New dividends.
Remainder o greatest dividend.
Product o di erence 1 and 2 with 2nd
Quotient (1).
New dividends.
Remainder o greatest dividend.
Product o di erence 1 and 2 with 3rd
Quotient (1).
New dividends.
Product o divisors by 4th Quotient (1).
+Remainder.+
4th Quotient.
3rd Quotient.
2nd Quotient.
1st Quotient.
+Quotient.+

[Footnote 4*: These igures are removed at the next step.]

The chie Abacists are Gerbert (tenth century), Abbo, and Hermannus
Contractus (1054), who are credited with the revival o the art,
Bernelinus, Gerland, and Radulphus o Laon (twel th century). We know as
English Abacists, Robert, bishop o Here ord, 1095, abacum et lunarem
compotum et celestium cursum astrorum rimatus, Turchillus Compotista
(Thurkil), and through him o Guilielmus R. . . . the best o living
computers, Gislebert, and Simonus de Rotellis (Simon o the Rolls).
They lourished most probably in the irst quarter o the twel th
century, as Thurkils treatise deals also with ractions. Walcher o
Durham, Thomas o York, and Samson o Worcester are also known as
Abacists.

Finally, the term Abacists came to be applied to computers by manual

arithmetic. A MS. Algorithm o the thirteenth century (Sl. 3281,
. 6, b), contains the ollowing passage: Est et alius modus secundum
operatores sive practicos, quorum unus appellatur Abacus; et modus ejus
est in computando per digitos et junctura manuum, et iste utitur ultra
Alpes.
In a composite treatise containing tracts written A.D. 1157 and 1208, on
the calendar, the abacus, the manual calendar and the manual abacus, we
have a number o the methods preserved. As an example we give the rule
or multiplication (Claud. A. IV., . 54 vo). Si numerus multiplicat
alium numerum au eratur di erentia majoris a minore, et per residuum
multiplicetur articulus, et una di erentia per aliam, et summa
proveniet. Example, 8 7. The di erence o 8 is 2, o 7 is 3, the
next article being 10; 7 - 2 is 5. 5 10 = 50; 2 3 = 6. 50 + 6 = 56
answer. The rule will hold in such cases as 17 15 where the article
next higher is the same or both, _i.e._, 20; but in such a case as
17 9 the di erence or each number must be taken rom the higher
article, _i.e._, the di erence o 9 will be 11.
THE ALGORISTS.
Algorism (augrim, augrym, algram, agram, algorithm), owes its name to
the accident that the irst arithmetical treatise translated rom the
Arabic happened to be one written by Al-Khowarazmi in the early ninth
century, de numeris Indorum, beginning in its Latin orm Dixit
Algorismi. . . . The translation, o which only one MS. is known, was
made about 1120 by Adelard o Bath, who also wrote on the Abacus and
translated with a commentary Euclid rom the Arabic. It is probable that
another version was made by Gerard o Cremona (1114-1187); the number o
important works that were not translated more than once rom the Arabic
decreases every year with our knowledge o medieval texts. A ew lines
o this translation, as copied by Halliwell, are given on p. 72, note 2.
Another translation still seems to have been made by Johannes
Hispalensis.
Algorism is distinguished rom Abacist computation by recognising seven
rules, Addition, Subtraction, Duplation, Mediation, Multiplication,
Division, and Extraction o Roots, to which were a terwards added
Numeration and Progression. It is urther distinguished by the use o
the zero, which enabled the computer to dispense with the columns o the
Abacus. It obviously employs a board with ine sand or wax, and later,
as a substitute, paper or parchment; slate and pencil were also used in
the ourteenth century, how much earlier is unknown.[5*] Algorism
quickly ousted the Abacus methods or all intricate calculations, being
simpler and more easily checked: in act, the astronomical revival o
the twel th and thirteenth centuries would have been impossible without
its aid.
[Footnote 5*: Slates are mentioned by Chaucer, and soon a ter
(1410) Prosdocimo de Beldamandi speaks o the use o a lapis
or making notes on by calculators.]
The number o Latin Algorisms still in manuscript is comparatively
large, but we are here only concerned with two--an Algorism in prose
attributed to Sacrobosco (John o Holywood) in the colophon o a Paris
manuscript, though this attribution is no longer regarded as conclusive,
and another in verse, most probably by Alexander de Villedieu (Villa

Dei). Alexander, who died in 1240, was teaching in Paris in 1209. His
verse treatise on the Calendar is dated 1200, and it is to that period
that his Algorism may be attributed; Sacrobosco died in 1256 and quotes
the verse Algorism. Several commentaries on Alexanders verse treatise
were composed, rom one o which our irst tractate was translated, and
the text itsel was rom time to time enlarged, sections on proo s and
on mental arithmetic being added. We have no indication o the source on
which Alexander drew; it was most likely one o the translations o
Al-Khowarasmi, but he has also the Abacists in mind, as shewn by
preserving the use o di erences in multiplication. His treatise, irst
printed by Halliwell-Phillipps in his _Rara Mathematica_, is adapted or
use on a board covered with sand, a method almost universal in the
thirteenth century, as some passages in the algorism o that period
already quoted show: Est et alius modus qui utitur apud Indos, et
doctor hujusmodi ipsos erat quidem nomine Algus. Et modus suus erat in
computando per quasdam iguras scribendo in pulvere. . . . Si
voluerimus depingere in pulvere predictos digitos secundum consuetudinem
algorismi . . . et sciendum est quod in nullo loco minutorum sive
secundorum . . . in pulvere debent scribi plusquam sexaginta.
MODERN ARITHMETIC.
Modern Arithmetic begins with Leonardi Fibonaccis treatise de Abaco,
written in 1202 and re-written in 1228. It is modern rather in the range
o its problems and the methods o attack than in mere methods o
calculation, which are o its period. Its sole interest as regards the
present work is that Leonardi makes use o the digital signs described
in Records treatise on _The arte o nombrynge by the hand_ in mental
arithmetic, calling it modus Indorum. Leonardo also introduces the
method o proo by casting out the nines.
DIGITAL ARITHMETIC.
The method o indicating numbers by means o the ingers is o
considerable age. The British Museum possesses two ivory counters marked
on one side by carelessly scratched Roman numerals IIIV and VIIII, and
on the other by care ully engraved digital signs or 8 and 9. Sixteen
seems to have been the number o a complete set. These counters were
either used in games or or the counting board, and the Museum ones,
coming rom the Hamilton collection, are undoubtedly not later than the
irst century. Frohner has published in the _Zeitschri t des Mnchener
Alterthumsvereins_ a set, almost complete, o them with a Byzantine
treatise; a Latin treatise is printed among Bedes works. The use o
this method is universal through the East, and a variety o it is ound
among many o the native races in A rica. In medieval Europe it was
almost restricted to Italy and the Mediterranean basin, and in the
treatise already quoted (Sloane 3281) it is even called the Abacus,
perhaps a memory o Fibonaccis work.
Methods o calculation by means o these signs undoubtedly have existed,
but they were too involved and liable to error to be much used.
THE USE OF ARABIC FIGURES.
It may now be regarded as proved by Bubnov that our present numerals are
derived rom Greek sources through the so-called Boethian apices,
which are irst ound in late tenth century manuscripts. That they were

not derived directly rom the Arabic seems certain rom the di erent
shapes o some o the numerals, especially the 0, which stands or 5 in
Arabic. Another Greek orm existed, which was introduced into Europe by
John o Basingstoke in the thirteenth century, and is igured by Matthew
Paris (V. 285); but this orm had no success. The date o the
introduction o the zero has been hotly debated, but it seems obvious
that the twel th century Latin translators rom the Arabic were
per ectly well acquainted with the system they met in their Arabic text,
while the earliest astronomical tables o the thirteenth century I have
seen use numbers o European and not Arabic origin. The act that Latin
writers had a convenient way o writing hundreds and thousands without
any cyphers probably delayed the general use o the Arabic notation.
Dr. Hill has published a very complete survey o the various orms
o numerals in Europe. They began to be common at the middle o the
thirteenth century and a very interesting set o amily notes concerning
births in a British Museum manuscript, Harl. 4350 shows their extension.
The irst is dated Mij^c. lviii., the second Mij^c. lxi., the third
Mij^c. 63, the ourth 1264, and the i th 1266. Another example is given
in a set o astronomical tables or 1269 in a manuscript o Roger
Bacons works, where the scribe began to write MCC6. and crossed out
the igures, substituting the Arabic orm.
THE COUNTING BOARD.
The treatise on pp. 52-65 is the only one in English known on the
subject. It describes a method o calculation which, with slight
modi ications, is current in Russia, China, and Japan, to-day, though it
went out o use in Western Europe by the seventeenth century. In Germany
the method is called Algorithmus Linealis, and there are several
editions o a tract under this name (with a diagram o the counting
board), printed at Leipsic at the end o the i teenth century and the
beginning o the sixteenth. They give the nine rules, but Capitulum de
radicum extractione ad algoritmum integrorum reservato, cujus species
per ci rales iguras ostenduntur ubi ad plenum de hac tractabitur. The
invention o the art is there attributed to Appulegius the philosopher.
The advantage o the counting board, whether permanent or constructed by
chalking parallel lines on a table, as shown in some sixteenth-century
woodcuts, is that only ive counters are needed to indicate the number
nine, counters on the lines representing units, and those in the spaces
above representing ive times those on the line below. The Russian
abacus, the tchatui or stchota has ten beads on the line; the
Chinese and Japanese Swanpan economises by dividing the line into two
parts, the beads on one side representing ive times the value o those
on the other. The Swanpan has usually many more lines than the
stchota, allowing or more extended calculations, see Tylor,
_Anthropology_ (1892), p. 314.
Records treatise also mentions another method o counter notation
(p. 64) merchants casting and auditors casting. These were adapted
or the usual English method o reckoning numbers up to 200 by scores.
This method seems to have been used in the Exchequer. A counting board
or merchants use is printed by Halliwell in _Rara Mathematica_ (p. 72)
rom Sloane MS. 213, and two others are igured in Egerton 2622 . 82
and . 83. The latter is said to be novus modus computandi secundum
inventionem Magistri Thome Thorleby, and is in principle, the same as
the Swanpan.
The Exchequer table is described in the _Dialogus de Scaccario_ (Ox ord,

1902), p. 38.

+The Earliest Arithmetics in English.+

+The Cra te o Nombrynge+

_Egerton 2622._
[*lea

136a]

Hec algorism{us} ars p{re}sens dicit{ur}; in qua

Talib{us} indor{um} ruim{ur} bis qui{n}q{ue} iguris.
[Sidenote: A derivation o Algorism. Another derivation o the word.]
This boke is called e boke o algorym, or Augrym a t{er} lewd{er} vse.
And is boke tretys e Cra t o Nombryng, e quych cra te is called also
Algorym. Ther was a kyng o Inde, e quich heyth Algor, & he made is
cra t. And a t{er} his name he called hit algory{m}; or els ano{er}
cause is quy it is called Algorym, or e latyn word o hit s.
Algorism{us} com{es} o Algos, grece, q{uid} e{st} ars, latine, cra t o
englis, and rides, q{uid} e{st} {nu}me{rus}, latine, A nomb{ur} o
englys, inde d{icitu}r Algorism{us} p{er} addic{i}one{m} hui{us} sillabe
m{us} & subtracc{i}onem d & e, q{ua}si ars num{er}andi. orthermor{e}
e most vnd{ir}stonde {a}t in is cra t ben vsid teen igurys, as here
ben{e} writen or ensampul, 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1. Expone e too
v{er}sus a or{e}: this p{re}sent cra t ys called Algorism{us}, in e
quych we vse teen signys o Inde. Questio. Why te yguris o Inde?
Solucio. or as I haue sayd a ore ai wer{e} onde yrst in Inde o a
kyng{e} o at Cuntre, {a}t was called Algor.
[Headnote: Notation and Numeration.]
[Sidenote: v{ersus} [in margin].]
Prima sig{ni ica}t unu{m}; duo ve{r}o s{e}c{un}da:
Tercia sig{ni ica}t tria; sic procede sinistre.
Don{e}c ad extrema{m} venias, que ci ra voca{tur}.
+ Cap{itulu}m primum de signi icac{i}o{n}e
[Sidenote: Expo{sitio} v{ersus}.]
[Sidenote: The meaning and place o the
read irst.]

igurar{um}.+
igures. Which igure is

In is verse is noti ide e signi icac{i}on o ese igur{is}. And us

expone the verse. e irst signi iyth on{e}, e secu{n}de [*lea 136b]
signi[*] iyth tweyn{e}, e thryd signi iyth thre, & the ourte
signi iyth 4. And so orthe towarde e ly t syde o e tabul or o e
boke {a}t e igures ben{e} writen{e} in, til at {o}u come to the
last igure, {a}t is called a ci re. Questio. In quych syde sittes e
irst igur{e}? Soluc{io}, orsothe loke quich igure is irst in e

ryt side o e bok or o e tabul, & {a}t same is e irst igur{e},

or {o}u schal write bakeward, as here, 3. 2. 6. 4. 1. 2. 5. The
ig{ur}e o 5. was irst write, & he is e irst, or he sittes o e
rit syde. And the ig{ur}e o 3 is last. Neu{er}-e-les wen he says
P{ri}ma sig{ni ica}t vnu{m} &c., at is to say, e irst betokenes
on{e}, e secu{n}de. 2. & ore-{er}-mor{e}, he vnd{ir}stondes not o
e irst ig{ur}e o eu{er}y rew. But he vnd{ir}stondes e irst
igure {a}t is in e nomb{ur} o e orsayd teen iguris, e quych is
on{e} o {e}se. 1. And e secu{n}de 2. & so orth.
[Sidenote: v{ersus} [in margin].]
Quelib{et} illar{um} si pr{im}o limite ponas,
Simplicite{r} se signi icat: si v{er}o se{cun}do,
Se decies: sursu{m} {pr}ocedas m{u}ltiplicando.
Na{m}q{ue} igura seque{n}s q{uam}uis signat decies pl{us}.
Ipsa locata loco quam sign{i ic}at p{ertin}ente.
[Transcribers Note:
In the ollowing section, numerals shown in +marks+ were printed in
a di erent ont, possibly as acsimiles o the original MS orm.]
[Sidenote: Expo{sitio} [in margin].]
[Sidenote: An explanation o the principles o notation. An example:
units, tens, hundreds, thousands. How to read the number.]
Expone is v{er}se us. Eu{er}y o ese iguris bitokens hym sel e &
no mor{e}, y he stonde in e irst place o e rewele / this worde
Simplicit{er} in at verse it is no more to say but at, & no mor{e}.
I it stonde in the secu{n}de place o e rewle, he betokens ten{e}
tymes hym sel e, as is igur{e} 2 here 20 tokens ten tyme hym sel e,
[*lea 137a] at is twenty, or he hym sel e betokenes twey{ne}, & ten
tymes twene is twenty. And or he stondis o e ly t side & in e
secu{n}de place, he betokens ten tyme hy{m} sel e. And so go orth.
or eu{er}y ig{ure}, & he stonde a t{ur} a-no{er} toward the ly t
side, he schal betoken{e} ten tymes as mich mor{e} as he schul betoken &
he stode in e place {ere} at e ig{ure} a- or{e} hym stondes. loo an
ensampull{e}. 9. 6. 3. 4. e ig{ure} o 4. {a}t hase is schape +4.+
betokens bot hymsel e, or he stondes in e irst place. The ig{ure} o
3. at hase is schape +3.+ betokens ten tymes mor{e} en he schuld & he
stode {ere} {a}t e ig{ure} o 4. stondes, {a}t is thretty. The
ig{ure} o 6, {a}t hase is schape +6+, betokens ten tymes mor{e} an
he schuld & he stode {ere} as e ig{ure} o +3.+ stondes, or {ere}
he schuld tokyn{e} bot sexty, & now he betokens ten tymes mor{e}, at is
sex hundryth. The ig{ure} o 9. {a}t hase is schape +9.+ betokens ten
tymes mor{e} an{e} he schuld & he stode in e place {ere} e ig{ure}
o sex stondes, or en he schuld betoken to 9. hundryth, and in e
place {ere} he stondes now he betokens 9. ousande. Al e hole nomb{ur}
is 9 thousande sex hundryth & our{e} & thretty. orthermor{e}, when
{o}u schalt rede a nomb{ur} o
ig{ure}, {o}u schalt begyn{e} at e
last ig{ure} in the ly t side, & rede so orth to e rit side as
her{e} 9. 6. 3. 4. Thou schal begyn to rede at e ig{ure} o 9. & rede
orth us. 9. [*lea 137b] thousand sex hundryth thritty & oure. But
when {o}u schall{e} write, {o}u schalt be-gynne to write at e ryt
side.
Nil ci ra sig{ni ica}t s{ed} dat signa{re} sequenti.
[Sidenote: The meaning and use o the cipher.]

Expone is v{er}se. A ci re tokens not, bot he makes e ig{ure} to

betoken at comes a t{ur} hym mor{e} an he schuld & he wer{e} away, as
us 1. her{e} e ig{ure} o on{e} tokens ten, & y e ci re wer{e}
away[{1}] & no ig{ure} by- or{e} hym he schuld token bot on{e}, or
an he sch{ul}d stonde in e irst place. And e ci re tokens nothyng
hym sel e. or al e nomb{ur} o e ylke too ig{ure}s is bot ten.
Questio. Why says he at a ci re makys a ig{ure} to signi ye (ty )
mor{e} &c. I speke or is worde signi icaty ,
or sothe it may happe
a t{ur} a ci re schuld come a-no{ur} ci re, as us 2. And et e
secunde ci re shuld token neu{er} e mor{e} excep he schuld kepe e
ord{er} o e place. and a ci re is no ig{ure} signi icaty .
+ Q{ua}m p{re}cedentes plus ulti{m}a signi icabit+ /
[Sidenote: The last igure means more than all the others,
since it is o the highest value.]
Expone is v{er}se us. e last igu{re} schal token mor{e} an all{e}
e o{er} a or{e}, thout {ere} wer{e} a hundryth thousant igures
a or{e}, as us, 16798. e last ig{ure} at is 1. betokens ten
thousant. And all{e} e o{er} ig{ure}s b{e}n bot betoken{e} bot sex
thousant seuyn{e} h{u}ndryth nynty & 8. And ten thousant is mor{e} en
all{e} at nomb{ur}, {er}go e last igu{re} tokens mor{e} an all e
nomb{ur} a or{e}.
[Headnote: The Three Kinds o Numbers]
[*lea

138a]

Post p{re}dicta scias breuit{er} q{uod} tres num{er}or{um}

Distincte species sunt; nam quidam digiti sunt;
Articuli quidam; quidam q{uoque} compositi sunt.
Capit{ulu}m 2^m de t{ri}plice divisione nu{mer}or{um}.
[Sidenote: Digits. Articles. Composites.]
The auctor o is tretis dep{ar}tys is worde a nomb{ur} into 3
p{ar}tes. Some nomb{ur} is called digit{us} latine, a digit in englys.
So{m}me nomb{ur} is called articul{us} latine. An Articul in englys.
Some nomb{ur} is called a composyt in englys. Expone is v{er}se. know
{o}u a t{ur} e orsayd rewles {a}t I sayd a ore, at {ere} ben thre
spices o nomb{ur}. Oon{e} is a digit, Ano{er} is an Articul, & e
to{er} a Composyt. v{er}sus.
[Headnote: Digits, Articles, and Composites.]
Sunt digiti num{er}i qui cit{ra} denariu{m} s{u}nt.
[Sidenote: What are digits.]
Her{e} he telles qwat is a digit, Expone v{er}su{s} sic. Nomb{ur}s
digitus ben{e} all{e} nomb{ur}s at ben w{i}t{h}-inne ten, as nyne,
8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1.
Articupli decupli degito{rum}; compositi s{u}nt
Illi qui constant ex articulis degitisq{ue}.
[Sidenote: What are articles.]

 Her{e} he telles what is a composyt and what is an{e} articul. Expone

sic v{er}sus. Articulis ben[{2}] all{e} {a}t may be deuidyt into
nomb{urs} o ten & nothyng{e} leue ou{er}, as twenty, thretty, ourty,
a hundryth, a thousand, & such o{er}, or twenty may be dep{ar}tyt
in-to 2 nomb{ur}s o ten, orty in to our{e} nomb{ur}s o ten, & so
orth.
[Sidenote: What numbers are composites.]
[*lea 138b] Compositys be nomb{ur}s at bene componyt o a digyt & o
an articull{e} as ouretene, y tene, sextene, & such o{er}. ortene
is co{m}ponyd o our{e} at is a digit & o ten at is an articull{e}.
i tene is componyd o 5 & ten, & so o all o{er}, what at ai ben.
Short-lych eu{er}y nomb{ur} at be-gynnes w{i}t{h} a digit & endyth in a
articull{e} is a composyt, as ortene bygennyng{e} by our{e} at is a
digit, & endes in ten.
Ergo, p{ro}posito nu{mer}o tibi scriber{e}, p{ri}mo
Respicias quid sit nu{merus}; si digitus sit
P{ri}mo scribe loco digitu{m}, si compositus sit
P{ri}mo scribe loco digitu{m} post articulu{m}; sic.
[Sidenote: How to write a number, i it is a digit; i it is a
composite. How to read it.]
here he telles how {o}u schalt wyrch whan {o}u schalt write a
nomb{ur}. Expone v{er}su{m} sic, & ac iuxta expon{ent}is sentencia{m};
whan {o}u hast a nomb{ur} to write, loke yrst what man{er} nomb{ur} it
ys {a}t {o}u schalt write, whether it be a digit or a composit or an
Articul. I he be a digit, write a digit, as y it be seuen, write
seuen & write {a}t digit in e irst place toward e ryght side. I it
be a composyt, write e digit o e composit in e irst place & write
e articul o at digit in e secunde place next toward e ly t side. As
y {o}u schal write sex & twenty. write e digit o e nomb{ur} in e
irst place at is sex, and write e articul next a t{ur} at is twenty,
as us 26. But whan {o}u schalt sowne or speke [*lea 139a] or rede an
Composyt ou schalt irst sowne e articul & a t{ur} e digit, as {o}u
seyst by e comyn{e} speche, Sex & twenty & nout twenty & sex.
v{er}sus.
Articul{us} si sit, in p{ri}mo limite ci ram,
Articulu{m} {vero} reliq{ui}s insc{ri}be igur{is}.
[Sidenote: How to write Articles: tens, hundreds, thousands, &c.]
Here he tells how {o}u schal write when e nombre {a}t {o}u hase to
write is an Articul. Expone v{er}sus sic & ac s{ecundu}m sentenciam.
I e e nomb{ur} {a}t {o}u hast write be an Articul, write irst a
ci re & a t{ur} e ci er write an Articull{e} us. 2. orthermor{e}
{o}u schalt vnd{ir}stonde y {o}u haue an Articul, loke how mych he
is, y he be w{i}t{h}-ynne an hundryth, {o}u schalt write bot on{e}
ci re, a ore, as her{e} .9. I e articull{e} be by hym-sil e & be an
hundrid euen{e}, en schal {o}u write .1. & 2 ci ers a or{e}, at he
may stonde in e thryd place, or eu{er}y ig{ure} in e thryd place
schal token a hundrid tymes hym sel e. I e articul be a thousant or
thousandes[{3}] and he stonde by hy{m} sel e, write a or{e} 3 ci ers &
so or o al o{er}.
Quolib{et} in nu{mer}o, si par sit p{ri}ma

igura,

Par erit & to{tu}m, quicquid sibi co{n}ti{nua}t{ur};

Imp{ar} si u{er}it, totu{m} tu{n}c iet {et} impar.
[Sidenote: To tell an even number or an odd.]
Her{e} he teches a gen{er}all{e} rewle {a}t y e irst ig{ure} in
e rewle o ig{ure}s token a nomb{ur} at is euen{e} al {a}t nomb{ur}
o ig{ur}ys in at rewle schal be euen{e}, as her{e} {o}u may see 6.
7. 3. 5. 4. Computa & p{ro}ba. I e irst [*lea 139b] ig{ur}e token
an nomb{ur} at is ode, all{e} at nomb{ur} in at rewle schall{e} be
ode, as her{e} 5 6 7 8 6 7. Computa & p{ro}ba. v{er}sus.
Septe{m} su{n}t partes, no{n} pl{u}res, istius artis;
Adder{e}, subt{ra}her{e}, duplar{e}, dimidiar{e},
Sextaq{ue} diuider{e}, s{ed} qui{n}ta m{u}ltiplicar{e};
Radice{m} ext{ra}her{e} p{ar}s septi{m}a dicitur esse.
[Headnote: The Seven Rules o Arithmetic.]
[Sidenote: The seven rules.]
Her{e} telles {a}t {er} be .7. spices or p{ar}tes o is cra t.
The irst is called addicio, e secunde is called subtraccio. The
thryd is called duplacio. The 4. is called dimydicio. The 5. is called
m{u}ltiplicacio. The 6 is called diuisio. The 7. is called extraccio
o e Rote. What all ese spices ben{e} hit schall{e} be tolde
singillati{m} in her{e} caputul{e}.
Subt{ra}his aut addis a dext{ri}s vel mediabis:
[Sidenote: Add, subtract, or halve, rom right to le t.]
Thou schal be-gynne in e ryght side o e boke or o a tabul. loke
wer{e} {o}u wul be-gynne to write latyn or englys in a boke, & {a}t
schall{e} be called e ly t side o the boke, at {o}u writest toward
{a}t side schal be called e ryght side o e boke. V{er}sus.
A leua dupla, diuide, m{u}ltiplica.
[Sidenote: Multiply or divide rom le t to right.]
Here he telles e in quych side o e boke or o e tabul {o}u
schall{e} be-gyn{e} to wyrch duplacio, diuisio, and m{u}ltiplicacio.
Thou schal begyn{e} to worch in e ly t side o e boke or o e tabul,
but yn what wyse {o}u schal wyrch in hym +dicetur singillatim in
seque{n}tib{us} capi{tulis} et de vtilitate cui{us}li{bet} art{is} & sic
Completur [*lea 140.] p{ro}hemi{um} & sequit{ur} tractat{us} & p{ri}mo
de arte addic{ion}is que p{ri}ma ars est in ordine.+
[Headnote: The Cra t o

Addition.]

++Adder{e} si nu{mer}o num{e}ru{m} vis, ordine tali

Incipe; scribe duas p{rim}o series nu{mer}or{um}
P{ri}ma{m} sub p{ri}ma recte pone{n}do igura{m},
Et sic de reliq{ui}s acias, si sint tibi plures.
[Sidenote: Four things must be known: what it is; how many rows o
igures; how many cases; what is its result. How to set down the sum.]
Her{e} by-gynnes e cra t o Addicio. In is cra t {o}u most knowe

oure thyng{es}. Fyrst {ou} most know what is addicio. Next {o}u
most know how mony rewles o igurys ou most haue. Next {o}u most
know how mony diue{r}s casys happes in is cra t o addicio. And next
qwat is e p{ro} et o is cra t. As or e irst ou most know at
addicio is a castyng to-ged{ur} o twoo nomburys in-to on{e} nombr{e}.
As y I aske qwat is twene & thre. {o}u wyl cast ese twene nomb{re}s
to-ged{ur} & say {a}t it is yue. As or e secunde ou most know
{a}t ou schall{e} haue tweyne rewes o igures, on{e} vndur a-nother,
as her{e} {o}u mayst se.
1234
2168.
As or e thryd ou most know {a}t ther{e} ben oure diu{er}se cases.
As or e orthe {o}u most know {a}t e p{ro} et o is cra t is to
telle what is e hole nomb{ur} {a}t comes o diu{er}se nomburis. Now as
to e texte o oure verse, he teches ther{e} how {o}u schal worch in
is cra t. He says y {o}u wilt cast on{e} nomb{ur} to ano{er}
nomb{ur}, ou most by-gynne on is wyse. yrst write [*lea 140b] two
rewes o iguris & nombris so at {o}u write e irst igur{e} o e
hyer nomb{ur} euen{e} vnd{ir} the irst ig{ure} o e nether nomb{ur},
And e secunde o e nether nomb{ur} euen{e} vnd{ir} e secunde o e
hyer, & so orthe o eu{er}y ig{ur}e o both e rewes as {o}u
mayst se.
123
234.
[Headnote: The Cases o the Cra t o

Addition.]

Inde duas adde p{ri}mas hac condic{i}one:

Si digitus crescat ex addic{i}one prior{um};
P{ri}mo scribe loco digitu{m}, quicu{n}q{ue} sit ille.
[Sidenote: Add the irst igures; rub out the top igure;
write the result in its place. Here is an example.]
Here he teches what {o}u schalt do when {o}u hast write too rewes o
iguris on vnder an-o{er}, as I sayd be- or{e}. He says {o}u schalt
take e irst ig{ur}e o e heyer nomb{re} & e yrst igur{e} o e
ne{er} nombre, & cast hem to-ged{er} vp-on is condicio. Thou schal
loke qwe{er} e nombe{r} at comys {ere}-o be a digit or no. I he
be a digit {o}u schalt do away e irst ig{ur}e o e hyer nomb{re},
and write {ere} in his stede at he stode Inne e digit, {a}t comes o
e ylke 2 ig{ur}es, & so wrich orth o o{er} igures y {ere} be ony
moo, til {o}u come to e ende toward e ly t side. And lede e nether
ig{ure} stonde still eu{er}-mor{e} til {o}u haue ydo. or {ere}-by
{o}u schal wyte whe{er} {o}u hast don{e} wel or no, as I schal tell
e a t{er}ward in e ende o is Chapt{er}. And loke allgate at ou
be-gynne to worch in is Cra t o [*lea 141a] Addi[*]cio in e ryt
side, here is an ensampul o is case.
1234
2142.
Caste 2 to our{e} & at wel be sex, do away 4. & write in e same place
e ig{ur}e o sex. And lete e ig{ur}e o 2 in e nether rewe stonde
stil. When {o}u hast do so, cast 3 & 4 to-ged{ur} and at wel be seuen
{a}t is a digit. Do away e 3, & set {ere} seue, and lete e ne{er}
ig{ure} stonde still{e}, & so worch orth bakward til {o}u hast ydo

all to-ged{er}.
Et si composit{us}, in limite scribe seque{n}te
Articulum, p{ri}mo digitum; q{uia} sic iubet ordo.
[Sidenote: Suppose it is a Composite, set down the digit,
and carry the tens. Here is an example.]
Here is e secunde case {a}t may happe in is cra t. And e case is
is, y o e casting o 2 nomburis to-ged{er}, as o e ig{ur}e o e
hyer rewe & o e igure o e ne{er} rewe come a Composyt, how schalt
{ou} worch. {us} {o}u schalt worch. Thou shalt do away e ig{ur}e o
e hyer nomb{er} at was cast to e igure o e ne{er} nomber. And
write {ere} e digit o e Composyt. And set e articul o e composit
next a t{er} e digit in e same rewe, y {ere} be no mo ig{ur}es
a t{er}. But y {ere} be mo iguris a t{er} at digit. And ere he
schall be rekend or hym sel e. And when {o}u schalt adde {a}t ylke
igure {a}t berys e articull{e} ou{er} his hed to e igur{e} vnd{er}
hym, {o}u schalt cast at articul to e igure {a}t hase hym ou{er}
his hed, & {ere} at Articul schal toke hym sel e. lo an Ensampull
[*lea 141b] o all.
326
216.
Cast 6 to 6, & {ere}-o wil arise twelue. do away e hyer 6 & write
{ere} 2, {a}t is e digit o is composit. And e{n} write e
articull{e} at is ten ou{er} e iguris hed o twene as {us}.
1
322
216.
Now cast e articull{e} {a}t standus vpon e ig{ur}is o twene hed to
e same ig{ur}e, & reken at articul bot or on{e}, and an {ere} wil
arise thre. an cast at thre to e ne{er} igure, at is on{e}, & at
wul be our{e}. do away e ig{ur}e o 3, and write {ere} a ig{ur}e o
oure. and lete e ne{er} ig{ur}e stonde stil, & an worch orth.
vn{de} {ver}sus.
Articulus si sit, in p{ri}mo limite ci ram,
Articulu{m} v{er}o reliquis inscribe iguris,
Vel p{er} se scribas si nulla igura sequat{ur}.
[Sidenote: Suppose it is an Article, set down a cipher and carry
the tens. Here is an example.]
Her{e} he puttes e thryde case o e cra t o Addicio. & e case is
is. y o Addiciou o 2 iguris a-ryse an Articull{e}, how schal {o}u
do. thou most do away e heer ig{ur}e {a}t was addid to e ne{er},
& write {ere} a ci re, and sett e articuls on e iguris hede, y
{a}t {ere} come ony a t{er}. And wyrch an as I haue tolde e in e
secunde case. An ensampull.
25.
15
Cast 5 to 5, at wylle be ten. now do away e hyer 5, & write {ere} a
ci er. And sette ten vpon e iguris hed o 2. And reken it but or on
us.] lo an Ensampull{e}

+----+
| 1 |
| 2 |
| 15 |
+----+
And [*lea 142a] an worch orth. But y {ere} come no igure a t{er}
e ci re, write e articul next hym in e same rewe as here
+---+
| 5 |
| 5 |
+---+
cast 5 to 5, and it wel be ten. do away 5. at is e hier 5. and write
{ere} a ci re, & write a t{er} hym e articul as us
+----+
| 1 |
| 5 |
+----+
And an {o}u hast done.
Si tibi ci ra sup{er}ueniens occurrerit, illa{m}
Dele sup{er}posita{m}; ac illic scribe igura{m},
Postea procedas reliquas addendo iguras.
[Sidenote: What to do when you have a cipher in the top row.
An example o all the di iculties.]
Her{e} he putt{es} e ourt case, & it is is, at y {ere} come a
ci er in e hier rewe, how {o}u schal do. us {o}u schalt do. do away
e ci er, & sett {ere} e digit {a}t comes o e addiciou{n} as us
184.
17743
In is ensampul ben all{e} e our{e} cases. Cast 3 to oure, {a}t wol
be seue. do away 4. & write {ere} seue; an cast 4 to e igur{e} o
8. {a}t wel be 12. do away 8, & sett {ere} 2. at is a digit, and
sette e articul o e composit, at is ten, vpon e ci ers hed, & reken
it or hym sel e at is on. an cast on{e} to a ci er, & hit wull{e} be
but on, or not & on makes but on{e}. an cast 7. {a}t stondes vnd{er}
at on to hym, & at wel be 8. do away e ci er & at 1. & sette {ere}
8. an go orthermor{e}. cast e o{er} 7 to e ci er {a}t stondes
ou{er} hy{m}. {a}t wul be bot seuen, or e ci er betokens not. do
away e ci er & sette {ere} seue, [*lea 142b] & en go or{er}mor{e}
& cast 1 to 1, & at wel be 2. do away e hier 1, & sette {ere} 2. an
hast {o}u do. And y {o}u haue wel ydo is nomber at is sett
her{e}-a t{er} wel be e nomber at schall{e} aryse o all{e} e
addicio as her{e} 27827. Sequi{tu}r alia sp{eci}es.
[Headnote: The Cra t o

Subtraction.]

++A nu{mer}o num{er}u{m} si sit tibi demer{e} cura

Scribe igurar{um} series, vt in addicione.
[Sidenote: Four things to know about subtraction: the irst;

the second; the third; the

ourth.]

This is e Chapt{er} o subtraccio, in the quych ou most know oure

nessessary thyng{es}. the irst what is subtraccio. e secunde is how
mony nombers ou most haue to subt{ra}ccio, the thryd is how mony
maners o cases {ere} may happe in is cra t o subtraccio. The ourte
is qwat is e p{ro} et o is cra t. As or e irst, {o}u most know
{a}t subtraccio is drawyng{e} o on{e} nowmb{er} oute o ano{er}
nomber. As or e secunde, ou most knowe {a}t ou most haue two rewes
o iguris on{e} vnd{er} ano{er}, as {o}u addyst in addicio. As or
e thryd, {o}u moyst know {a}t our{e} man{er} o diu{er}se casis mai
happe in is cra t. As or e ourt, ou most know {a}t e p{ro} et
o is cra t is whenne {o}u hasse taken e lasse nomber out o e
mor{e} to telle what {ere} leues ou{er} {a}t. & {o}u most be-gynne to
wyrch in {is} cra t in e ryght side o e boke, as {o}u diddyst in
addicio. V{er}sus.
Maiori nu{mer}o num{er}u{m} suppone minorem,
Siue pari nu{mer}o supponat{ur} num{er}us par.
[Sidenote: Put the greater number above the less.]
[*lea 143a] Her{e} he telles at e hier nomber most be mor{e} en e
ne{er}, or els eue as mych. but he may not be lasse. And e case is
is, ou schalt drawe e ne{er} nomber out o e hyer, & ou mayst not
do {a}t y e hier nomber wer{e} lasse an at. or {o}u mayst not
draw sex out o 2. But {o}u mast draw 2 out o sex. And ou maiste draw
twene out o twene, or ou schal leue not o e hier twene vn{de}
v{er}sus.
[Headnote: The Cases o the Cra t o

Subtraction.]

Postea si possis a prima subt{ra}he p{ri}ma{m}

Scribens quod remanet.
[Sidenote: The

irst case o subtraction. Here is an example.]

Her{e} is e irst case put o subtraccio, & he says ou schalt begynne

in e ryght side, & draw e irst ig{ure} o e ne{er} rewe out o e
irst ig{ure} o e hier rewe. qwether e hier ig{ur}e be mor{e} en
e ne{er}, or eue as mych. And at is noti ied in e vers when he says
Si possis. Whan {o}u has us ydo, do away e hiest ig{ur}e & sett
{ere} at leues o e subtraccio, lo an Ensampull{e}
+-----+
| 234 |
| 122 |
+-----+
draw 2 out o 4. an leues 2. do away 4 & write {ere} 2, & latte e
ne{er} igur{e} sto{n}de stille, & so go or-by o{er} iguris till
{o}u come to e ende, an hast {o}u do.
Ci ram si nil remanebit.
[Sidenote: Put a cipher i

nothing remains. Here is an example.]

Her{e} he putt{es} e secunde case, & hit is is. y it happe {a}t

qwen {o}u hast draw on ne{er} ig{ure} out o a hier, & {er}e leue
not a t{er} e subt{ra}ccio, us [*lea 143b] ou schalt do. {o}u

schall{e} do away e hier ig{ur}e & write {ere} a ci er, as lo an

Ensampull
+----+
| 24 |
| 24 |
+----+
Take our{e} out o our{e} an leus not. {er}e or{e} do away e hier
4 & set {ere} a ci er, an take 2 out o 2, an leues not. do away e
hier 2, & set {ere} a ci er, and so worch whar{e} so eu{er} is happe.
Sed si no{n} possis a p{ri}ma dem{er}e p{ri}ma{m}
P{re}cedens vnu{m} de limite deme seque{n}te,
Quod demptu{m} p{ro} denario reputabis ab illo
Subt{ra}he to{ta}lem num{er}u{m} qu{em} p{ro}posuisti
Quo acto sc{ri}be super quicquid remaneb{i}t.
[Sidenote: Suppose you cannot take the lower igure rom the top one,
borrow ten; take the lower number rom ten; add the answer to the top
number. How to Pay back the borrowed ten. Example.]
Her{e} he puttes e thryd case, e quych is is. y it happe at e
ne{er} ig{ur}e be mor{e} en e hier ig{ur}e at he schall{e} be draw
out o . how schall{e} ou do. us {o}u schall{e} do. ou schall{e}
borro .1. oute o e next ig{ur}e at comes a t{er} in e same rewe,
or is case may neu{er} happ but y {ere} come igures a t{er}. an
{o}u schalt sett at on ou{er} e hier igur{es} hed, o the quych ou
woldist y-draw oute e ney{er} ig{ur}e y {o}u haddyst y-myt. Whane
ou hase us ydo ou schall{e} rekene {a}t .1. or ten. . And out o
at ten {o}u schal draw e neyermost ig{ur}e, And all{e} {a}t leues
ou schall{e} adde to e igur{e} on whos hed at .1. stode. And en
{o}u schall{e} do away all{e} at, & sett {ere} all{e} that arisys o
the addicio o e ylke 2 ig{ur}is. And y yt [*lea 144a] happe at e
ig{ur}e o e quych {o}u schalt borro on be hym sel but 1. I {o}u
schalt at on{e} & sett it vppo e o{er} igur{is} hed, and sett in
{a}t 1. place a ci er, y {ere} come mony igur{es} a t{er}. lo an
Ensampul.
+------+
| 2122 |
| 1134 |
+------+
take 4 out o 2. it wyl not be, er or{e} borro on{e} o e next
igur{e}, {a}t is 2. and sett at ou{er} e hed o e yrst 2. & rekene
it or ten. and ere e secunde stondes write 1. or {o}u tokest on out
o hy{m}. an take e ne{er} ig{ur}e, at is 4, out o ten. And en
leues 6. cast to 6 e ig{ur}e o at 2 at stode vnd{er} e hedde o 1.
at was borwed & rekened or ten, and at wylle be 8. do away {a}t 6 &
at 2, & sette {ere} 8, & lette e ne{er} ig{ur}e stonde stille.
Whanne {o}u hast do us, go to e next ig{ur}e {a}t is now bot 1. but
irst yt was 2, & {ere}-o was borred 1. an take out o {a}t e
ig{ur}e vnd{er} hym, {a}t is 3. hit wel not be. er- or{e} borowe o
the next ig{ur}e, e quych is bot 1. Also take & sett hym ou{er} e
hede o e ig{ure} at ou woldest haue y-draw oute o e nether
igure, e quych was 3. & ou myt not, & rekene {a}t borwed 1 or ten
& sett in e same place, o e quych place {o}u tokest hy{m} o ,
a ci er, or he was bot 1. Whanne {o}u hast {us} ydo, take out o at
1. {a}t is rekent or ten, e ne{er} igure o 3. And {ere} leues 7.

[*lea 144b] cast e ylke 7 to e ig{ur}e at had e ylke ten vpon his
hed, e quych ig{ur}e was 1, & at wol be 8. an do away {a}t 1 and
{a}t 7, & write {ere} 8. & an wyrch orth in o{er} iguris til {o}u
come to e ende, & an {o}u hast e do. V{er}sus.
Facque nonenarios de ci ris, cu{m} remeabis
Occ{ur}rant si orte ci re; dum demps{er}is vnum
Postea p{ro}cedas reliquas deme{n}do iguras.
[Sidenote: A very hard case is put. Here is an example.]
Her{e} he putt{es} e ourte case, e quych is is, y it happe at e
ne{er} ig{ur}e, e quych {o}u schalt draw out o e hier ig{ur}e be
mor{e} pan e hier igur ou{er} hym, & e next ig{ur}e o two or o
thre or o oure, or how mony {ere} be by ci ers, how wold {o}u do.
{o}u wost wel {o}u most nede borow, & {o}u mayst not borow o e
ci ers, or ai haue not at ai may lene or spar{e}. Ergo[{4}] how
woldest {o}u do. Certay us most {o}u do, {o}u most borow on o e
next igure signi icaty in at rewe, or is case may not happe, but y
{ere} come igures signi icaty a t{er} the ci ers. Whan {o}u hast
borowede {a}t 1 o the next igure signi icaty , sett {a}t on ou{er}
e hede o {a}t ig{ur}e o e quych {o}u wold haue draw e ne{er}
igure out y {o}u hadest myt, & reken it or ten as o{u} diddest
i{n} e o{er} case her{e}-a- or{e}. Wha {o}u hast us y-do loke how
mony ci ers {ere} wer{e} bye-twene at igur{e} signi icaty , & e
ig{ur}e o e quych {o}u woldest haue y-draw the [*lea 145a] ne{er}
igure, and o eu{er}y o e ylke ci ers make a igur{e} o 9. lo an
Ensampull{e} a ter.
+-----+
|40002|
|10004|
+-----+
Take 4 out o 2. it wel not be. borow 1 out o be next igure
signi icaty , e quych is 4, & en leues 3. do away {a}t igur{e} o 4
& write {ere} 3. & sett {a}t 1 vppon e ig{ur}e o 2 hede, & an take
4 out o ten, & an ere leues 6. Cast 6 to the ig{ur}e o 2, {a}t wol
be 8. do away at 6 & write {er}e 8. Whan {o}u hast us y-do make o
eu{er}y 0 betweyn 3 & 8 a igure o 9, & an worch orth in goddes name.
& y {o}u hast wel y-do {o}u[{5}] schalt haue is nomb{er}
+-----+
|39998| Sic.
|10004|
+-----+
[Headnote: How to prove the Subtraction.]
Si subt{ra}cc{i}o sit b{e}n{e} acta p{ro}bar{e} valebis
Quas s{u}btraxisti p{ri}mas addendo iguras.
[Sidenote: How to prove a subtraction sum. Here is an example.
He works his proo through, and brings out a result.]
Her{e} he teches e Cra t how {o}u schalt know, whan {o}u hast
subt{ra}yd, whe{er} ou hast wel ydo or no. And e Cra t is is, ryght
as {o}u subtrayd e ne{er} igures ro e hier igures, ryt so adde
e same ne{er} igures to e hier igures. And y {o}u haue well
y-wroth a- or{e} ou schalt haue e hier nombre e same {o}u haddest or

ou be-gan to worch. as or is I bade ou schulde kepe e ne{er}

igures stylle. lo an [*lea 145b] Ensampull{e} o all{e} e 4 cases
toged{re}. worche well{e} is case
+--------+
|40003468|.
|20004664|
+--------+
And y ou worch well{e} whan ou hast all{e} subtrayd e {a}t hier
nombr{e} her{e}, is schall{e} be e nombre here oloyng whan {o}u hast
subtrayd.
+--------+
|39998804|. [Sidenote: Our author makes a slip here (3 or 1).]
|20004664|
+--------+
And ou schalt know {us}. adde e ne{er} rowe o e same nombre to e
hier rewe as us, cast 4 to 4. at wol be 8. do away e 4 & write {ere}
8. by e irst case o addicio. an cast 6 to 0 at wol be 6. do away
e 0, & write ere 6. an cast 6 to 8, {a}t wel be 14. do away 8 &
write {ere} a ig{ur}e o 4, at is e digit, and write a ig{ur}e o
1. {a}t schall be-token ten. {a}t is e articul vpon e hed o 8 next
a t{er}, an reken {a}t 1. or 1. & cast it to 8. at schal be 9. cast
to at 9 e ne{er} ig{ur}e vnd{er} at e quych is 4, & at schall{e}
be 13. do away at 9 & sett {er}e 3, & sett a igure o 1. {a}t schall
be 10 vpon e next igur{is} hede e quych is 9. by e secu{n}de case
{a}t {o}u hadest in addicio. an cast 1 to 9. & at wol be 10. do
away e 9. & at 1. And write {ere} a ci er. and write e articull{e}
at is 1. betokenyng{e} 10. vpon e hede o e next igur{e} toward e
ly t side, e quych [*lea 146a] is 9, & so do orth tyl {o}u come to
e last 9. take e igur{e} o at 1. e quych {o}u schalt ynde ou{er}
e hed o 9. & sett it ou{er} e next igures hede at schal be 3.
Also do away e 9. & set {ere} a ci er, & en cast at 1 at stondes
vpon e hede o 3 to e same 3, & {a}t schall{e} make 4, en caste to
e ylke 4 the igur{e} in e ney{er} rewe, e quych is 2, and at
schall{e} be 6. And en schal {o}u haue an Ensampull{e} aey, loke &
se, & but {o}u haue is same {o}u hase myse-wrot.
+--------+
|60003468|
|20004664|
+--------+
Sequit{ur} de duplac{i}one
[Headnote: The Cra t o

Duplation.]

++Si vis duplar{e} num{er}u{m}, sic i{n}cipe p{rim}o

Scribe ig{ur}ar{um} serie{m} q{ua}mcu{n}q{ue} vel{is} tu.
[Sidenote: Four things must be known in Duplation. Here they are.
Mind where you begin. Remember your rules.]
This is the Chaptur{e} o duplacio, in e quych cra t {o}u most haue
& know 4 thing{es}. e irst {a}t {o}u most know is what is
duplacio. e secu{n}de is how mony rewes o ig{ur}es {o}u most haue
to is cra t. e thryde is how many cases may[{6}] happe in is cra t.

 e ourte is what is e p{ro} et o e cra t. As or e irst.

duplacio is a doublyng{e} o a nombre. As or e secu{n}de {o}u most
[*lea 146b] haue on nombre or on rewe o igures, the quych called
nu{merus} dupland{us}. As or e thrid {o}u most know at 3 diu{er}se
cases may hap in is cra t. As or e ourte. qwat is e p{ro} et o is
cra t, & {a}t is to know what a-risyt o a nombre I-doublyde.
or{er}-mor{e}, {o}u most know & take gode hede in quych side {o}u
schall{e} be-gyn in is cra t, or ellis {o}u mayst spyl all{e} {i}
lab{er} {er}e aboute. c{er}teyn {o}u schalt begy in the ly t side in
is Cra t. thenke wel ou{er} is verse. [{7}]A leua dupla, diuide,
m{u}ltiplica.[{7}] [[Subt{ra}has a{u}t addis a dext{ri}s {ve}l
medi{a}b{is}]] The sentens o es verses a or{e}, as {o}u may see i
{o}u take hede. As e text o is verse, at is to say, Si vis
duplare. is is e sentence. I {o}u wel double a nombre us {o}u
most be-gyn. Write a rewe o igures o what nomb{re} ou welt.
v{er}sus.
Postea p{ro}cedas p{ri}ma{m} duplando igura{m}
Inde q{uo}d excrescit scribas vbi iusserit ordo
Iuxta p{re}cepta tibi que dant{ur} in addic{i}one.
[Sidenote: How to work a sum.]
Her{e} he telles how {o}u schalt worch in is Cra t. he says, yrst,
whan {o}u hast writen e nombre {o}u schalt be-gyn at e irst
igur{e} in the ly t side, & doubull{e} at ig{ur}e, & e nombre at
comes {ere}-o {o}u schalt write as {o}u diddyst in addicio, as
I schal telle e in e case. v{er}sus.
[Headnote: The Cases o
[*lea

the Cra t o

Duplation.]

147a]

Nam si sit digitus in primo limite scribas.

[Sidenote: I the answer is a digit, write it in the place o
top igure.]

the

Her{e} is e irst case o is cra t, e quych is is. y o duplacio

o a igur{e} arise a digit. what schal {o}u do. us {o}u schal do. do
away e ig{ur}e at was doublede, & sett {ere} e diget at comes o
e duplacio, as us. 23. double 2, & {a}t wel be 4. do away e
igur{e} o 2 & sett {ere} a igur{e} o 4, & so worch orth till{e}
{o}u come to e ende. v{er}sus.
Articul{us} si sit, in p{ri}mo limite ci ram,
Articulu{m} v{er}o reliquis inscribe iguris;
Vel p{er} se scribas, si nulla igura sequat{ur}.
[Sidenote: I it is an article, put a cipher in the place, and
carry the tens. I there is no igure to carry them to, write
them down.]
Here is e secunde case, e quych is is y {ere} come an articull{e}
o e duplacio o a ig{ur}e {o}u schalt do ryt as {o}u diddyst in
addicio, at is to wete at {o}u schalt do away e igur{e} at is
doublet & sett {ere} a ci er, & write e articull{e} ou{er} e next
igur{is} hede, y {ere} be any a t{er}-warde toward e ly t side as
us. 25. begyn at the ly t side, and doubull{e} 2. at wel be 4. do away
at 2 & sett ere 4. an doubul 5. at wel be 10. do away 5, & sett

{ere} a 0, & sett 1 vpon e next igur{is} hede e quych is 4. & en

draw downe 1 to 4 & at woll{e} be 5, & en do away {a}t 4 & at 1,
& sett {ere} 5. or at 1 schal be rekened in e drawyng{e} toged{re}
or 1. wen [*lea 147b] ou hast ydon ou schalt haue is nomb{r}e 50.
y {ere} come no igur{e} a t{er} e ig{ur}e {a}t is addit, o e
quych addicio comes an articull{e}, {o}u schalt do away e igur{e}
{a}t is dowblet & sett {ere} a 0. & write e articul next by in e
same rewe toward e ly t syde as us, 523. double 5 at woll be ten. do
away e igur{e} 5 & set {ere} a ci er, & sett e articul next a t{er}
in e same rewe toward e ly t side, & ou schalt haue is nombre 1023.
en go orth & double e o{er} nombers e quych is lyt y-nowt to do.
v{er}sus.
Compositus si sit, in limite sc{ri}be seq{uen}te
Articulu{m}, p{ri}mo digitu{m}; q{uia} sic iubet ordo:
Et sic de reliq{ui}s acie{n}s, si sint tibi plures.
[Sidenote: I it is a Composite, write down the digit, and carry
the tens. Here is an example.]
Her{e} he putt{es} e Thryd case, e quych is is, y o duplacio o
a ig{ur}e come a Composit. {o}u schalt do away e ig{u}re {a}t is
doublet & set {ere} a digit o e Composit, & sett e articull{e}
ou{er} e next igures hede, & a t{er} draw hym downe w{i}t{h} e
igur{e} ou{er} whos hede he stondes, & make {ere}-o an nombre as
{o}u hast done a ore, & y {ere} come no ig{ur}e a t{er} at digit
at {o}u hast y-write, a{n} set e articull{e} next a t{er} hym in e
same rewe as us, 67: double 6 at wel be 12, do away 6 & write {ere}
e digit [*lea 148a] o 12, e quych is 2, and set e articull{e} next
a t{er} toward e ly t side in e same rewe, or {ere} comes no
igur{e} a t{er}. an dowble at o{er} igur{e}, e quych is 7, at wel
be 14. the quych is a Composit. en do away 7 at {o}u doublet & sett
e e diget o hy{m}, the quych is 4, sett e articull{e} ou{er} e next
igur{es} hed, e quych is 2, & en draw to hym at on, & make on nombre
e quych schall{e} be 3. And en y {o}u haue wel y-do {o}u schall{e}
haue is nombre o e duplacio, 134. v{er}sus.
Si super ext{re}ma{m} nota sit monade{m} dat eid{em}
Quod t{ibi} {con}tingat si p{ri}mo dimidiabis.
[Sidenote: How to double the mark or one-hal . This can only stand
over the irst igure.]
Her{e} he says, y ou{er} e yrst ig{ur}e in e ryt side be such a
merke as is her{e} made, , {o}u schall{e} yrst doubull{e} e
igur{e}, the quych stondes vnd{er} {a}t merke, & en ou schalt doubul
at merke e quych stond{es} or haluendel on. or too haluedels makes
on, & so {a}t wol be on. cast {a}t on to at duplacio o e igur{e}
ou{er} whos hed stode at merke, & write it in e same place {ere} at
e igur{e} e quych was doublet stode, as us 23 . double 3, at wol be
6; doubul at halue on, & at wol be on. cast on to 6, {a}t wel be 7.
do away 6 & at 1, & sett {ere} 7. an hase ou do. as or at
igur{e}, an go [*lea 148b] to e o{er} ig{ure} & worch orth.
& {o}u schall neu{er} haue such a merk but ou{er} e hed o e urst
igure in e ryght side. And et it schal not happe but y it were
y-halued a- or{e}, us {o}u schalt vnd{er}stonde e verse. Si sup{er}
ext{re}ma{m} &c. Et nota, talis ig{ur}a
signi icans medietate{m},
unitat{is} veniat, {i.e.} contingat u{e}l iat sup{er} ext{re}ma{m},
{i.e.} sup{er} p{ri}ma{m} igura{m} in ext{re}mo sic v{er}sus dextram
ars dat: {i.e.} reddit monade{m}. {i.e.} vnitate{m} eide{m}. {i.e.}

eidem note & declina{tur} hec monos, d{i}s, di, dem, &c. Quod {er}g{o}
to{tum} ho{c} dabis monade{m} note {con}ting{et}. {i.e.} eveniet tibi si
dimidiasti, {i.e.} accipisti u{e}l subtulisti medietatem alicuius unius,
in cuius principio sint igura nu{mer}u{m} denotans i{m}pare{m} p{rim}o
{i.e.} principiis.
[Headnote: The Cra t o

Mediation.]

Sequit{ur} de mediacione.
++Incipe sic, si vis alique{m} nu{me}ru{m} mediar{e}:
Sc{ri}be igurar{um} seriem sola{m}, velut an{te}.
[Sidenote: The our things to be known in mediation: the irst the
second; the third; the ourth. Begin thus.]
In is Chapter is tat e Cra t o mediaciou, in e quych cra t {o}u
most know 4 thynges.
urst what is mediacio. the secunde how mony
rewes o igur{es} {o}u most haue in e wyrchyng{e} o is cra t. e
thryde how mony diu{er}se cases may happ in is cra t.[{8}] [[the .4.
what is e p{ro} et o is cra t.]] As or e urst, {o}u schalt
vndurstonde at mediacio is a takyng out o hal e a nomber out o a
holle nomber, [*lea 149a] as y {o}u wolde take 3 out o 6. As or
e secunde, {o}u schalt know {a}t {o}u most haue on{e} rewe o
igures, & no moo, as {o}u hayst in e cra t o duplacio. As or the
thryd, ou most vnd{er}stonde at 5 cases may happe in is cra t. As
or e ourte, ou schall{e} know at the p{ro} et o is cra t is when
{o}u hast take away e haluendel o a nomb{re} to telle qwat er{e}
schall{e} leue. Incipe sic, &c. The sentence o is verse is is. y
{o}u wold medye, at is to say, take hal e out o e holle, or hal e
out o hal e, ou most begynne {us}. Write on{e} rewe o igur{es} o
what nombre ou wolte, as {o}u dyddyst be- or{e} in e Cra t o
duplacio. v{er}sus.
Postea p{ro}cedas medians, si p{ri}ma igura
Si par aut i{m}par videas.
[Sidenote: See i the number is even or odd.]
Her{e} he says, when {o}u hast write a rewe o
igures, {o}u schalt
take hede whe{er} e irst igur{e} be eue or odde in nombre, &
vnd{er}stonde {a}t he spekes o e irst igure in e ryt side. And
i{n} the ryght side {o}u schall{e} begynne in is Cra t.
Quia si u{er}it par,
Dimidiab{is} eam, scribe{n}s quicq{ui}d remanebit:
[Sidenote: I it is even, halve it, and write the answer in its
place.]
Her{e} is the irst case o is cra t, e quych is is, y e irst
igur{e} be euen. ou schal take away ro e igur{e} euen hal e, & do
away at ig{ur}e and set {ere} at leues ou{er}, as us, 4. take
[*lea 149b] hal e out o 4, & an {ere} leues 2. do away 4 & sett
{ere} 2. is is lyght y-nowt. v{er}sus.
[Headnote: The Mediation o

an Odd Number.]

Impar si u{er}it vnu{m} demas mediar{e}

Quod no{n} p{re}sumas, s{ed} quod sup{er}est mediabis

Inde sup{er} tractu{m}

ac demptu{m} quod no{ta}t vnu{m}.

[Sidenote: I it is odd, halve the even number less than it. Here is
an example. Then write the sign or one-hal over it. Put the mark
only over the irst igure.]
Her{e} is e secunde case o is cra t, the quych is is. y e irst
igur{e} betoken{e} a nombre at is odde, the quych odde schal not be
mediete, en {o}u schalt medye at nombre at leues, when the odde o
e same nomb{re} is take away, & write at {a}t leues as {o}u diddest
in e irst case o is cra t. Wha {o}u hayst write at. or {a}t at
leues, write such a merke as is her{e}
vpon his hede, e quych merke
schal betoke hal e o e odde at was take away. lo an Ensampull. 245.
the irst igur{e} her{e} is betokenyng{e} odde nombre, e quych is 5,
or 5 is odde; {er}e- or{e} do away at {a}t is odde, e quych is 1.
en leues 4. en medye 4 & en leues 2. do away 4. & sette {ere} 2,
& make such a merke
upon his hede, at is to say ou{er} his hede o 2
as us. 242. And en worch orth in e o{er} igures tyll {o}u come
to e ende. by e urst case as {o}u schalt vnd{er}stonde at {o}u
schalt [*lea 150a] neu{er} make such a merk but ou{er} e irst
ig{ur}e hed in e rit side. Whe{er} e other ig{ur}es at comy
a t{er} hym be eue or odde. v{er}sus.
[Headnote: The Cases o the Cra t o

Mediation.]

Si monos, dele; sit t{ibi} ci ra post no{ta} supra.

[Sidenote: I the

irst igure is one put a cipher.]

Here is e thryde case, e quych y the irst igur{e} be a igur{e}

o 1. {o}u schalt do away at 1 & set {ere} a ci er, & a merke ou{er}
e ci er as us, 241. do away 1, & sett {ere} a ci er w{i}t{h} a merke
ou{er} his hede, & en hast {o}u ydo or at 0. as us 0 en worch
orth in e oer ig{ur}ys till {o}u come to e ende, or it is lyght
as dyche water. vn{de} v{er}sus.
Postea p{ro}cedas hac condic{i}one secu{n}da:
Imp{ar} si u{er}it hinc vnu{m} deme p{ri}ori,
Inscribens quinque, nam denos signi icabit
Monos p{re}d{ict}am.
[Sidenote: What to do i any other igure is odd. Write a igure o
ive over the next lower numbers head. Example.]
Her{e} he putt{es} e ourte case, e quych is is. y it happe the
secunde igur{e} betoken odde nombre, ou schal do away on o at odde
nombre, e quych is signi icatiue by {a}t igure 1. e quych 1 schall
be rekende or 10. Whan {o}u hast take away {a}t 1 out o e nombre
{a}t is signi iede by at igur{e}, {o}u schalt medie {a}t at leues
ou{er}, & do away at igur{e} at is medied, & sette in his styde hal e
o {a}t nombre. Whan {o}u hase so done, {o}u schalt write [*lea
150b] a igure o 5 ou{er} e next igur{es} hede by- or{e} toward e
ryt side, or at 1, e quych made odd nombr{e}, schall stonde or ten,
& 5 is hal e o 10; so {o}u most write 5 or his haluendell{e}. lo an
Ensampull{e}, 4678. begy in e ryt side as {o}u most nedes. medie 8.
en {o}u schalt leue 4. do away at 8 & sette {ere} 4. en out o 7.
take away 1. e quych makes odde, & sett 5. vpon e next igur{es} hede
a or{e} toward e ryt side, e quych is now 4. but a or{e} it was 8.
or at 1 schal be rekenet or 10, o e quych 10, 5 is hal e, as ou
knowest wel. Whan {o}u hast us ydo, medye {a}t e quych leues a t{er}

e takying{e} away o at at is odde, e quych leuyng{e} schall{e} be

3; do away 6 & sette {er}e 3, & ou schalt haue such a nombre
5
4634.
a t{er} go orth to e next ig{ur}e, & medy at, & worch
is lyt ynovt to e c{er}tay.

orth, or it

Si v{er}o s{e}c{un}da dat vnu{m}.

Illa deleta, sc{ri}bat{ur} ci ra; p{ri}ori
Tradendo quinque pro denario mediato;
Nec ci ra sc{ri}batur, nisi dei{n}de ig{ur}a seq{u}at{ur}:
Postea p{ro}cedas reliq{ua}s mediando iguras
Vt sup{ra} docui, si sint tibi mille igure.
[Sidenote: I the second igure is one, put a cipher, and write
ive over the next igure. How to halve ourteen.]
Her{e} he putt{es} e 5 case, e quych is [*lea 151a] is: y e
secunde igur{e} be o 1, as is is here 12, ou schalt do away at 1 &
sett {ere} a ci er. & sett 5 ou{er} e next ig{ur}e hede a or{e}
toward e rit side, as ou diddyst a or{e}; & at 5 schal be haldel o
at 1, e quych 1 is rekent or 10. lo an Ensampull{e}, 214. medye 4.
{a}t schall{e} be 2. do away 4 & sett {ere} 2. e{n} go orth to e
next igur{e}. e quych is bot 1. do away at 1. & sett {ere} a ci er.
& set 5 vpon e igur{es} hed a or{e}, e quych is nowe 2, & en ou
schalt haue is no{m}b{re}
5
202,
en worch orth to e nex ig{ur}e. And also it is no mayst{er}y y
{ere} come no igur{e} a ter at on is medyet, {o}u schalt write no 0.
ne nowt ellis, but set 5 ou{er} e next ig{ur}e a or{e} toward e
ryt, as us 14. medie 4 then leues 2, do away 4 & sett {ere} 2. en
medie 1. e q{ui}ch is rekende or ten, e halue{n}del {ere}-o wel be
5. sett {a}t 5 vpon e hede o {a}t igur{e}, e quych is now 2, & do
away {a}t 1, & ou schalt haue is nombre y {o}u worch wel,
5
2.
vn{de} v{er}sus.
[Headnote: How to prove the Mediation.]
Si mediacio sit b{e}n{e} {ac}ta p{ro}bar{e} valeb{is}
Duplando num{er}u{m} que{m} p{ri}mo di{m}ediasti
[Sidenote: How to prove your mediation. First example. The second.
The third example. The ourth example. The i th example.]
Her{e} he telles e how ou schalt know whe{er} ou hase wel ydo or
no. doubul [*lea 151b] e nombre e quych {o}u hase mediet, and y
{o}u haue wel y-medyt a ter e dupleacio, ou schalt haue e same
nombre at {o}u haddyst in e tabull{e} or {o}u began to medye, as
us. The urst ensampull{e} was is. 4. e quych I-mediet was la t 2,
e whych 2 was write in e place {a}t 4 was write a or{e}. Now
doubull{e} at 2, & {o}u schal haue 4, as {o}u hadyst a or{e}. e

secunde Ensampull{e} was is, 245. When {o}u haddyst mediet all{e} is
nomb{re}, y ou haue wel ydo ou schalt haue o {a}t mediacio is
nombre, 122 . Now doubull{e} is nombre, & begyn in e ly t side;
doubull{e} 1, at schal be 2. do away at 1 & sett {ere} 2. en
doubull{e} {a}t o{er} 2 & sett {ere} 4, en doubull{e} at o{er} 2,
& at wel be 4. e{n} doubul at merke at stondes or halue on. & at
schall{e} be 1. Cast at on to 4, & it schall{e} be 5. do away at 2 &
at merke, & sette {ere} 5, & en {o}u schal haue is nombre 245. &
is wos e same nombur {a}t {o}u haddyst or {o}u began to medye, as
{o}u mayst se y ou take hede. The nombre e quych ou haddist or an
Ensampul in e 3 case o mediacio to be mediet was is 241. whan {o}u
haddist medied all{e} is nombur truly [*lea 152a] by eu{er}y igur{e},
ou schall haue be {a}t mediacio is nombur 120 . Now dowbul is
nomb{ur}, & begyn in e ly t side, as I tolde e in e Cra t o
duplacio. us doubull{e} e ig{ur}e o 1, at wel be 2. do away at 1
& sett {ere} 2, en doubul e next igur{e} a ore, the quych is 2,
& at wel be 4; do away 2 & set {ere} 4. en doubul e ci er, & at wel
be not, or a 0 is not. And twyes not is but not. {ere} or{e}
doubul the merke aboue e ci ers hede, e quych betokenes e halue{n}del
o 1, & at schal be 1. do away e ci er & e merke, & sett {ere} 1,
& en {o}u schalt haue is nombur 241. And is same nombur {o}u
haddyst a ore or {o}u began to medy, & y {o}u take gode hede. The
next ensampul at had in e 4 case o mediacio was is 4678. Whan {o}u
hast truly ymedit all{e} is nombur ro e begynnyng{e} to e endyng{e},
{o}u schalt haue o e mediacio is nombur
5
2334.
Now doubul this nombur & begyn in e ly t side, & doubull{e} 2 at schal
be 4. do away 2 and sette ere 4; en doubul{e} 3, {a}t wol be 6; do
away 3 & sett {ere} 6, en doubul at o{er} 3, & at wel be 6; do away
3 & set {ere} [*lea 152b] 6, en doubul e 4, at welle be 8; en
doubul 5. e quych stondes ou{er} e hed o 4, & at wol be 10; cast 10
to 8, & {a}t schal be 18; do away 4 & at 5, & sett {ere} 8, & sett
that 1, e quych is an articul o e Composit e quych is 18, ou{er} e
next igur{es} hed toward e ly t side, e quych is 6. drav {a}t 1 to
6, e quych 1 in e dravyng schal be rekente bot or 1, & {a}t 1 &
{a}t 6 togedur wel be 7. do away at 6 & at 1. the quych stondes
ou{er} his hede, & sett ther 7, & en ou schalt haue is nombur 4678.
And is same nombur {o}u hadyst or {o}u began to medye, as {o}u mayst
see in e secunde Ensampul at ou had in e 4 case o mediacio, at
was is: when {o}u had mediet truly all{e} the nombur, a p{ri}ncipio
usque ad ine{m}. {o}u schalt haue o at mediacio is nombur
5
102.
Now doubul 1. at wel be 2. do away 1 & sett {ere} 2. en doubul 0.
{a}t will be not. {ere} or{e} take e 5, e quych stondes ou{er} e
next igur{es} hed, & doubul it, & at wol be 10. do away e 0 at
stondes betwene e two ig{u}r{i}s, & sette {ere} in his stid 1, or
{a}t 1 now schal stonde in e secunde place, wher{e} he schal betoken
10; en doubul 2, at wol be 4. do away 2 & sett ere 4. & [*lea 153a]
ou schal haue us nombur 214. is is e same nu{m}bur at {o}u hadyst
or {o}u began to medye, as {o}u may see. And so do eu{er} mor{e}, y
{o}u wil knowe whe{er} ou hase wel ymedyt or no. . doubull{e} e
nu{m}bur at comes a t{er} e mediaciou, & {o}u schal haue e same
nombur {a}t {o}u hadyst or {o}u began to medye, y {o}u haue welle
ydo. or els doute e not, but y {o}u haue e same, {o}u hase aylide

in {i} Cra t.
+Sequitur de multiplicatione.+
[Headnote: The Cra t o

Multiplication.]

[Headnote: To write down a Multiplication Sum.]

++Si tu p{er} num{er}u{m} num{er}u{m} vis m{u}ltiplicar{e}
Scribe duas q{ua}scu{nque} velis series nu{me}ror{um}
Ordo s{er}vet{ur} vt vltima m{u}ltiplicandi
Ponat{ur} sup{er} ant{er}iorem multiplicant{is}
A leua reliq{u}e sint scripte m{u}ltiplicantes.
[Sidenote: Four things to be known o Multiplication: the irst:
the second: the third: the ourth. How to set down the sum. Two
sorts o Multiplication: mentally, and on paper.]
Her{e} be-gynnes e Chapt{r}e o m{u}ltiplicatio, in e quych ou
most know 4 thynges. F irst, qwat is m{u}ltiplicacio. The secunde,
how mony cases may hap in multiplicacio. The thryde, how mony rewes o
igur{es} {ere} most be. The 4. what is e p{ro} et o is cra t.
As or e irst, {o}u schal vnd{er}stonde at m{u}ltiplicacio is a
bryngyng{e} to-ged{er} o 2 thyng{es} in on nombur, e quych on nombur
{con}tynes so mony tymes on, howe [*lea 153b] mony tymes {ere} ben
vnytees in e nowmb{re} o at 2, as twyes 4 is 8. now her{e} ben e 2
nomb{er}s, o e quych too nowmbr{e}s on is betokened be an adu{er}be,
e quych is e worde twyes, & is worde thryes, & is worde our{e}
sythes,[{9}] [[& is wordes yue sithe & sex sythes.]] & so urth o
such other lyke wordes. And tweyn nombres schal be tokenyde be a
nowne, as is worde our{e} showys es twey nombres y-broth in-to on
hole nombur, at is 8, or twyes 4 is 8, as {o}u wost wel. And es
nomb{re} 8 conteynes as o t tymes 4 as {ere} ben vnites in {a}t other
nomb{re}, e quych is 2, or in 2 ben 2 vnites, & so o t tymes 4 ben in
8, as {o}u wottys wel. or e secu{n}de, {o}u most know at {o}u
most haue too rewes o igures. As or e thryde, {o}u most know
{a}t 8 man{er} o diu{er}se case may happe in is cra t. The p{ro} et
o is Cra t is to telle when a nomb{re} is m{u}ltiplyed be a no{er},
qwat co{m}mys {ere} o . orthermor{e}, as to e sentence o our{e}
verse, y {o}u wel m{u}ltiply a nombur be a-no{er} nomb{ur}, ou
schalt write [*lea 154a] a rewe o igures o what nomb{ur}s so eu{er}
{o}u welt, & at schal be called Num{erus} m{u}ltiplicand{us}, Anglice,
e nomb{ur} the quych to be m{u}ltiplied. en {o}u schalt write
a-nother rewe o igur{e}s, by e quych {o}u schalt m{u}ltiplie the
nombre at is to be m{u}ltiplied, o e quych nomb{ur} e urst ig{ur}e
schal be write vnd{er} e last igur{e} o e nomb{ur}, e quych is to
be m{u}ltiplied. And so write orthe toward e ly t side, as her{e} you
may se,
+----------+
|
67324 |
| 1234
|
+----------+
And is on{e} nomb{ur} schall{e} be called nu{meru}s m{u}ltiplicans.
An{gli}ce, e nomb{ur} m{u}ltipliyng{e}, or he schall{e} m{u}ltiply e
hyer nounb{ur}, as us on{e} tyme 6. And so orth, as I schal telle the
a t{er}warde. And ou schal begyn in e ly t side. or-{ere}-more
ou schalt vndurstonde at {ere} is two man{ur}s o m{u}ltiplicacio;

one ys o e wyrchyng{e} o e boke only in e mynde o a mon. yrst he

teches o e yrst man{er} o duplacio, e quych is be wyrchyng{e} o
tabuls. A t{er}warde he wol teche on e secunde man{er}. vn{de}
v{er}sus.
[Headnote: To multiply one Digit by another.]
In digitu{m} cures digitu{m} si duc{er}e ma{i}or
[*lea 154b.]
P{er} qua{n}tu{m} distat a denis respice debes
Namq{ue} suo decuplo totiens deler{e} mi{n}ore{m}
Sitq{ue} tibi nu{meru}s veniens exinde patebit.
[Sidenote: How to multiply two digits. Subtract the greater rom ten;
take the less so many times rom ten times itsel . Example.]
Her{e} he teches a rewle, how {o}u schalt ynde e nounb{r}e at
comes by e m{u}ltiplicacio o a digit be ano{er}. loke how mony
[vny]tes ben. bytwene e mor{e} digit and 10. And reken ten or on
vnite. And so o t do away e lasse nounbre out o his owne decuple, at
is to say, ro at nounb{r}e at is ten tymes so mych is e nounb{re}
{a}t comes o e m{u}ltiplicacio. As y {o}u wol m{u}ltiply 2 be 4.
loke how mony vnitees ben by-twene e quych is e mor{e} nounb{re},
& be-twene ten. C{er}ten {ere} wel be vj vnitees by-twene 4 & ten.
y {o}u reken {ere} w{i}t{h} e ten e vnite, as ou may se. so mony
tymes take 2. out o his decuple, e quych is 20. or 20 is e decuple
o 2, 10 is e decuple o 1, 30 is e decuple o 3, 40 is e decuple o
4, And e o{er} digetes til {o}u come to ten; & whan {o}u hast y-take
so mony tymes 2 out o twenty, e quych is sex tymes, {o}u schal leue 8
as {o}u wost wel, or 6 times 2 is twelue. take [1]2 out o twenty,
& {ere} schal leue 8. bot y bothe e digett{es} [*lea 155a] ben
y-lyech mych as her{e}. 222 or too tymes twenty, en it is no ors quych
o hem tweyn {o}u take out o here decuple. als mony tymes as {a}t is
ro 10. but neu{er}-e-lesse, y {o}u haue hast to worch, {o}u schalt
haue her{e} a tabul o igures, wher{e}-by {o}u schalt se a-non ryght
what is e nounbre {a}t comes o e multiplicacio o 2 digittes. us
{o}u schalt worch in is ig{ur}e.
[Sidenote: Better use this table, though. How to use it. The way to
use the Multiplication table.]
1|
----2| 4|
-------3| 6| 9|
----------4| 8|12|16|
-------------5|10|15|20|25|
----------------6|12|18|24|30|36|
-------------------7|14|21|28|35|42|49|
----------------------8|16|24|32|40|48|56|64|
-------------------------9|18|27|36|45|54|63|72|81|
---------------------------1| 2| 3| 4| 5| 6| 7| 8| 9|

---------------------------y e ig{ur}e, e quych schall{e} be m{u}ltiplied, be euen{e} as mych

as e diget be, e quych at o{er} igur{e} schal be m{u}ltiplied,
as two tymes tway, or thre tymes 3. or sych other. loke qwer{e} at
ig{ur}e sittes in e ly t side o e t{ri}angle, & loke qwer{e} e
diget sittes in e ne{er} most rewe o e triangle. & go ro hym
vpwarde in e same rewe, e quych rewe gose vpwarde til {o}u come
agaynes e o{er} digette at sittes in e ly t side o e t{ri}angle.
And at nounbre, e quych ou [*lea 155b] yn[*]des {ere} is e
nounbre at comes o the m{u}ltiplicacio o e 2 digittes, as y ou
wold wete qwat is 2 tymes 2. loke quer{e} sittes 2 in e ly t side i{n}
e irst rewe, he sittes next 1 in e ly t side al on hye, as {o}u may
se; e[{n}] loke qwer{e} sittes 2 in e lowyst rewe o e t{ri}angle,
& go ro hym vpwarde in e same rewe tyll{e} ou come a-enenes 2 in e
hyer place, & er ou schalt ynd ywrite 4, & at is e nounb{r}e at
comes o e multiplicacio o two tymes tweyn is 4, as ow wotest
well{e}. y e diget. the quych is m{u}ltiplied, be mor{e} an e
o{er}, ou schalt loke qwer{e} e mor{e} diget sittes in e lowest rewe
o e t{ri}angle, & go vpwarde in e same rewe tyl[{10}] {o}u come
a-nendes e lasse diget in the ly t side. And {ere} {o}u schalt ynde
e no{m}b{r}e at comes o e m{u}ltiplicacio; but {o}u schalt
vnd{er}stonde at is rewle, e quych is in is v{er}se. In digitu{m}
cures, &c., no{er} is t{ri}angle schall{e} not s{er}ue, bot to ynde
e nounbres {a}t comes o the m{u}ltiplicacio at comes o 2 articuls
or {com}posites, e nedes no cra t but y ou wolt m{u}ltiply in i
mynde. And [*lea 156a] ere-to ou schalt haue a cra t a t{er}warde,
or ou schall wyrch w{i}t{h} digettes in e tables, as ou schalt know
a t{er}warde. v{er}sus.
[Headnote: To multiply one Composite by another.]
Postea p{ro}cedas postrema{m} m{u}ltiplica{n}do
[Recte multiplicans per cu{n}ctas i{n} eriores]
Condic{i}onem tamen t{a}li q{uod} m{u}ltiplicant{es}
Scribas in capite quicq{ui}d p{ro}cesserit inde
Sed postq{uam} uit hec m{u}ltiplicate ig{ur}e
Anteriorent{ur} serei m{u}ltiplica{n}t{is}
Et sic m{u}ltiplica velut isti m{u}ltiplicasti
Qui sequit{ur} nu{mer}u{m} sc{ri}ptu{m} quiscu{n}q{ue}

igur{is}.

[Sidenote: How to multiply one number by another. Multiply the last

igure o the higher by the irst o the lower number. Set the
answer over the irst o the lower: then multiply the second o the
lower, and so on. Then antery the lower number: as thus. Now multiply
by the last but one o the higher: as thus. Antery the igures again,
and multiply by ive: Then add all the igures above the line: and
you will have the answer.]
Her{e} he teches how {o}u schalt wyrch in is cra t. ou schalt
m{ul}tiplye e last igur{e} o e nombre, and quen {o}u hast so ydo
ou schalt draw all{e} e igures o e ne{er} nounbre mor{e} taward e
ryt side, so qwe{n} {o}u hast m{u}ltiplyed e last igur{e} o e
heyer nounbre by all{e} e ne{er} igures. And sette e nounbir at
comes er-o ou{er} e last igur{e} o e ne{er} nounb{re}, & en ou
schalt sette al e o{er} ig{ur}es o e ne{er} nounb{re} mor{e}
ner{e} to e ryt side. And whan ou hast m{u}ltiplied at igur{e}
at schal be m{u}ltiplied e next a t{er} hym by al e ne{er} igures.
And worch as ou dyddyst a or{e} til [*lea 156b] ou come to e ende.
And ou schalt vnd{er}stonde at eu{er}y igur{e} o e hier nounb{re}

schal be m{u}ltiplied be all{e} e igur{e}s o the ne{er} nounbre,

y e hier nounb{re} be any igur{e} en on{e}. lo an Ensampul her{e}
olowyng{e}.
+------+
| 2465|.
|232 |
+------+
ou schalt begyne to m{u}ltiplye in e ly t side. M{u}ltiply 2 be 2, and
twyes 2 is 4. set 4 ou{er} e hed o {a}t 2, en m{u}ltiplie e same
hier 2 by 3 o e nether nounbre, as thryes 2 at schal be 6. set 6
ou{er} e hed o 3, an m{u}ltiplie e same hier 2 by at 2 e quych
stondes vnd{er} hym, {a}t wol be 4; do away e hier 2 & sette {ere} 4.
Now {o}u most antery e nether nounbre, at is to say, {o}u most
sett e ne{er} nounbre more towarde e ryt side, as us. Take e
ne{er} 2 toward e ryt side, & sette it eue vnd{er} e 4 o e hyer
nounb{r}e, & ant{er}y all{e} e igures at comes a t{er} at 2, as us;
sette 2 vnd{er} e 4. en sett e igur{e} o 3 {ere} at e igure o
2 stode, e quych is now vndur {a}t 4 in e hier nounbre; en sett e
oer igur{e} o 2, e quych is e last ig{ur}e toward e ly t side o
e ne{er} nomb{er} {ere} e igur{e} o 3 stode. en {o}u schalt haue
such a nombre.
+------+
|464465|
| 232 |
+------+
[*lea 157a] Now m{u}ltiply 4, e quych comes next a t{er} 6, by e
last 2 o e ne{er} nounbur toward e ly t side. as 2 tymes 4, at wel
be 8. sette at 8 ou{er} e igure the quych stondes ou{er} e hede o
at 2, e quych is e last igur{e} o e ne{er} nounbre; an multiplie
at same 4 by 3, at comes in e ne{er} rewe, at wol be 12. sette e
digit o e composyt ou{er} e igure e quych stondes ou{er} e hed o
at 3, & sette e articule o is co{m}posit ou{er} al e igures at
stondes ou{er} e ne{er} 2 hede. en m{u}ltiplie e same 4 by e 2 in
e ryt side in e ne{er} nounbur, at wol be 8. do away 4. & sette
{ere} 8. Eu{er} mor{e} qwen {o}u m{u}ltiplies e hier igur{e} by at
igur{e} e quych stondes vnd{er} hym, ou schalt do away at hier
igur{e}, & sett er at nounbre e quych comes o m{u}ltiplicacio o
ylke digittes. Whan ou hast done as I haue byde e, {o}u schalt haue
suych an ord{er} o igur{e} as is her{e},
+--------+
| 1
|.
| 82
|
|4648[65]|
| 232
|
+--------+
en take and ant{er}y i ne{er} igures. And sett e yrst ig{ur}e o
e ne{er} igures[{11}] vndre be igur{e} o 6. And draw al e o{er}
igures o e same rewe to hym-warde, [*lea 157b] as {o}u diddyst
a ore. en m{u}ltiplye 6 be 2, & sett at e quych comes ou{er}
{ere}-o ou{er} al e o{er} igures hedes at stondes ou{er} at 2.
en m{u}ltiply 6 be 3, & sett all{e} at comes {ere}-o vpon all{e} e
igur{e}s hedes at standes ou{er} at 3; a{n} m{u}ltiplye 6 be 2, e
quych stondes vnd{er} at 6, en do away 6 & write {ere} e digitt o
e composit at schal come {ere}o , & sette e articull ou{er} all{e}

e igures at stondes ou{er} e hede o at 3 as her{e},

+------+
| 11 |
| 121 |
| 828 |
|464825|
| 232 |
+------+
en ant{er}y i igures as ou diddyst a or{e}, and m{u}ltipli 5 be 2,
at wol be 10; sett e 0 ou{er} all e igures {a}t stonden ou{er} at
2, & sett {a}t 1. ou{er} the next igures hedes, all{e} on hye towarde
e ly t side. en m{u}ltiplye 5 be 3. at wol be 15, write 5 ou{er} e
igures hedes at stonden ou{er} {a}t 3, & sett at 1 ou{er} e next
igur{e}s hedes toward e ly t side. en m{u}ltiplye 5 be 2, at wol be
10. do away at 5 & sett {ere} a 0, & sett at 1 ou{er} e igures
hedes at stonden ou{er} 3. And en ou schalt haue such a nounbre as
here stondes a tur.[*lea 158a]
+------+
| 11 |
| 1101 |
| 1215 |
| 82820|
|4648 |
| 232|
+------+
Now draw all{e} ese igures downe toged{er} as us, 6.8.1. & 1 draw
to-gedur; at wolle be 16, do away all{e} ese igures saue 6. lat hym
stonde, or ow {o}u take hym away ou most write er e same aene.
{ere} or{e} late hym stonde, & sett 1 ou{er} e igur{e} hede o 4
toward e ly t side; en draw on to 4, at woll{e} be 5. do away at 4 &
at 1, & sette {ere} 5. en draw 4221 & 1 toged{ur}, at wol be 10. do
away all{e} at, & write ere at 4 & at 0, & sett at 1 ou{er} e next
igur{es} hede toward e ly t side, e quych is 6. en draw at 6 & at
1 togedur, & at wolle be 7; do away 6 & sett {ere} 7, en draw 8810 &
1, & at wel be 18; do away all{e} e igures {a}t stondes ou{er} e
hede o at 8, & lette 8 stonde stil, & write at 1 ou{er} e next
ig{u}r{is} hede, e quych is a 0. en do away at 0, & sett {ere} 1,
e quych stondes ou{er} e 0. hede. en draw 2, 5, & 1 toged{ur}, at
woll{e} be 8. en do away all{e} at, & write {ere} 8. And en ou
schalt haue is nounbre, 571880.
[Headnote: The Cases o this Cra t.]
[*lea 158b]
S{ed} cu{m} m{u}ltiplicabis, p{ri}mo sic e{st} op{er}andu{m},
Si dabit articulu{m} tibi m{u}ltiplicacio solu{m};
P{ro}posita ci ra su{m}ma{m} t{ra}ns erre meme{n}to.
[Sidenote: What to do i the irst multiplication results in an
article.]
Her{e} he puttes e yrst case o is cra t, e quych is is: y
{ere} come an articulle o e m{u}ltiplicacio ysette be or{e} the
articull{e} in e ly t side as us

+---+
| 51|.
|23 |
+---+
multiplye 5 by 2, at wol be 10; sette ou{er} e hede o at 2 a 0,
& sett at on, at is e articul, in e ly t side, at is next hym, en
{o}u schalt haue is nounbre
+----+
|1051|.
| 23 |
+----+
And en worch orth as ou diddist a ore. And {o}u schalt
vnd{er}stonde at {o}u schalt write no 0. but whan at place where ou
schal write at 0 has no igure a ore hy{m} no{er} a t{er}. v{er}sus.
Si aut{em} digitus excreu{er}it articul{us}q{ue}.
Articul{us}[{12}] sup{ra}p{osit}o digito salit vltra.
[Sidenote: What to do i

the result is a composite number.]

Her{e} is e secunde case, e quych is is: y hit happe at {ere}

come a composyt, ou schalt write e digitte ou{er} e hede o e
ne{er} igur{e} by e quych {o}u multipliest e hier igure; and sett
e articull{e} next hym toward e ly t side, as ou diddyst a ore, as
{us}
+---+
| 83|.
|83 |
+---+
Multiply 8 by 8, at wol be 64. Write e 4 ou{er} 8, at is to say,
ou{er} e hede o e ne{er} 8; & set 6, e quych [*lea 159a] is an
articul, next a t{er}. And en ou schalt haue such a nounb{r}e as is
her{e},
+-----------+
| 6483[{13}]|,
| 83
|
+-----------+
And en worch orth.
Si digitus t{amen} ponas ip{su}m sup{er} ip{s}am.
[Sidenote: What i

it be a digit.]

Her{e} is e thryde case, e quych is is: y hit happe at o i

m{u}ltiplicaciou come a digit, {o}u schalt write e digit ou{er} e
hede o e ne{er} igur{e}, by the quych ou m{u}ltipliest e hier{e}
igur{e}, or is nedes no Ensampul.
Subdita m{u}ltiplica non hanc que [incidit] illi
Delet ea{m} penit{us} scribens quod p{ro}uenit inde.
[Sidenote: The ourth case o the cra t.]

 Her{e} is e 4 case, e quych is: y hit be happe at e ne{er}

igur{e} schal multiplye at igur{e}, e quych stondes ou{er} at
igures hede, ou schal do away e hier igur{e} & sett {er}e at
{a}t comys o {a}t m{u}ltiplicacio. As y {er}e come o at
m{u}ltiplicacio an articuls ou schalt write ere e hier igur{e}
stode a 0. And write e articuls in e ly t side, y at hit be a
digit write {er}e a digit. y at h{i}t be a composit, write e digit
o e composit. And e articul in e ly t side. al is is lyt y-nowt,
{er}e- or{e} er nedes no Ensampul.
S{ed} si m{u}ltiplicat alia{m} ponas sup{er} ip{s}am
Adiu{n}ges num{er}u{m} que{m} p{re}bet duct{us} ear{um}.
[Sidenote: The

i th case o

the cra t.]

Her{e} is e 5 case, e quych is is: y [*lea 159b] e ne{er}

igur{e} schul m{u}ltiplie e hier, and at hier igur{e} is not recte
ou{er} his hede. And at ne{er} igur{e} hase o{er} igures, or on
igure ou{er} his hede by m{u}ltiplicacio, at hase be a or{e}, ou
schalt write at nounbre, e quych comes o at, ou{er} all{e} e ylke
igures hedes, as us here:
+-----+
| 236|
|234 |
+-----+
Multiply 2 by 2, at wol be 4; set 4 ou{er} e hede o at 2. en[{14}]
m{u}ltiplies e hier 2 by e ne{er} 3, at wol be 6. set ou{er} his
hede 6, multiplie e hier 2 by e ne{er} 4, at wol be 8. do away e
hier 2, e quych stondes ou{er} e hede o e igur{e} o 4, and set
{er}e 8. And ou schalt haue is nounb{re} here
+-------+
| 46836 |
| 234 |
+-------+
And antery i igur{e}s, at is to say, set i ne{er} 4 vnd{er} e hier
3, and set i 2 other igures ner{e} hym, so at e ne{er} 2 stonde
vnd{ur} e hier 6, e quych 6 stondes in e ly t side. And at 3 at
stondes vndur 8, as us a tur e may se,
+-------+
| 46836 |
| 234 |
+-------+
Now worch orthermor{e}, And m{u}ltiplye at hier 3 by 2, at wol be 6,
set {a}t 6 e quych stondes ou{er} e hede o at 2, And en worch as I
tat e a ore.
[*lea 160a]
Si sup{ra}posita ci ra debet m{u}ltiplicar{e}
Prorsus ea{m} deles & ibi scribi ci ra debet.
[Sidenote: The sixth case o

the cra t.]

Her{e} is e 6 case, e quych is is: y hit happe at e igur{e} by

e quych ou schal m{u}ltiplye e hier igur{e}, e quych stondes ryght

ou{er} hym by a 0, ou schalt do away at igur{e}, e quych ou{er} at
ci re hede. And write {ere} at nounbre at comes o e
m{u}ltiplicacio as us, 23. do away 2 and sett {er}e a 0. vn{de}
v{er}sus.
Si ci ra m{u}ltiplicat alia{m} posita{m} sup{er} ip{s}am
Sitq{ue} locus sup{ra} vacu{us} sup{er} hanc ci ra{m} iet.
[Sidenote: The seventh case o the cra t.]
Her{e} is e 7 case, e quych is is: y a 0 schal m{u}ltiply a
igur{e}, e quych stondes not recte ou{er} hym, And ou{er} at 0 stonde
no thyng, ou schalt write ou{er} at 0 ano{er} 0 as us:
+----+
| 24|
|03 |
+----+
multiplye 2 be a 0, it wol be nothyng{e}. write ere a 0 ou{er} e hede
o e ne{er} 0, And en worch orth til ou come to e ende.
Si sup{ra}[{15}]

uerit ci ra sem{per} e{st} p{re}t{er}eunda.

[Sidenote: The eighth case o the cra t.]

Her{e} is e 8 case, e quych is is: y {ere} be a 0 or mony ci ers
in e hier rewe, {o}u schalt not m{u}ltiplie hem, bot let hem stonde.
And antery e igures benee to e next igur{e} sygni icaty as us:
+-----+
|00032|.
|22 |
+-----+
Ou{er}-lepe all{e} ese ci ers & sett at [*lea 160b] ne{er} 2 at
stondes toward e ryght side, and sett hym vnd{ur} e 3, and sett e
o{er} nether 2 nere hym, so at he stonde vnd{ur} e thrydde 0, e
quych stondes next 3. And an worch. vnd{e} v{er}sus.
Si dubites, an sit b{e}n{e} m{u}ltiplicac{i}o acta,
Diuide totalem nu{mer}u{m} p{er} multiplicante{m}.
[Sidenote: How to prove the multiplication.]
Her{e} he teches how ou schalt know whe{er} ou hase wel I-do or no.
And he says at ou schalt deuide all{e} e nounb{r}e at comes o e
m{u}ltiplicacio by e ne{er} igures. And en ou schalt haue e same
nounbur at {o}u hadyst in e begynnyng{e}. but et ou hast not e
cra t o dyuisio, but {o}u schalt haue hit a t{er}warde.
P{er} num{er}u{m} si vis nu{mer}u{m} q{u}oq{ue} m{u}ltiplicar{e}
T{antu}m p{er} normas subtiles absq{ue} iguris
Has normas pot{er}is p{er} v{er}sus scir{e} sequentes.
[Sidenote: Mental multiplication.]
Her{e} he teches e to m{u}ltiplie be owt igures in i mynde. And
e sentence o is v{er}se is is: y o{u} wel m{u}ltiplie on nounbre

by ano{er} in i mynde, {o}u schal haue {er}eto rewles in e v{er}ses

at schal come a t{er}.
Si tu p{er} digitu{m} digitu{m} vis m{u}ltiplicar{e}
Re{gula} p{re}cedens dat qualit{er} est op{er}andu{m}.
[Sidenote: Digit by digit is easy.]
Her{e} he teches a rewle as ou hast a or{e} to m{u}ltiplie a digit be
ano{er}, as y ou wolde wete qwat is sex tymes 6. ou [*lea 161a]
schalt wete by e rewle at I tat e be or{e}, y ou haue mynde
{er}o .
Articulu{m} si p{er} reliquu{m} reliquu{m} vis m{u}lti{plica}r{e}
In p{ro}p{r}iu{m} digitu{m} debet vt{er}q{ue} resolui.
Articul{us} digitos post se m{u}ltiplicantes
Ex digit{us} quociens retenerit m{u}ltipli{ca}r{i}
Articuli aciu{n}t tot centu{m} m{u}ltiplicati.
[Sidenote: The irst case o the cra t. Article by article; an
example: another example:]
[Headnote: How to work subtly without Figures.]
[Sidenote: Mental multiplication. Another example. Another example.
Notation. Notation again. Mental multiplication.]
Her{e} he teches e urst rewle, e quych is is: y ou wel
m{u}ltiplie an articul be ano{er}, so at both e articuls bene
w{i}t{h}-Inne an hundreth, us {o}u schalt do. take e digit o bothe
the articuls, or eu{er}y articul hase a digit, en m{u}ltiplye at on
digit by at o{er}, and loke how mony vnytes ben in e nounbre at
comes o e m{u}ltiplicacio o e 2 digittes, & so mony hundrythes ben
in e nounb{re} at schal come o e m{u}ltiplicacio o e ylke 2
articuls as us. y {o}u wold wete qwat is ten tymes ten. take e digit
o ten, e quych is 1; take e digit o at o{er} ten, e quych is on.
Also m{u}ltiplie 1 be 1, as on tyme on at is but 1. In on is but on
vnite as ou wost welle, {er}e or{e} ten tymes ten is but a hundryth.
Also y ou wold wete what is twenty tymes 30. take e digit o
twenty, at is 2; & take e digitt o thrytty, at is 3. m{u}ltiplie 3
be 2, at is 6. Now in 6 ben 6 vnites, And so mony hundrythes ben in
20 tymes 30[*lea 161b], {ere} or{e} 20 tymes 30 is 6 hundryth eue.
loke & se. But y it be so at on{e} articul be w{i}t{h}-Inne an
hundryth, or by-twene an hundryth and a thowsande, so at it be not a
owsande ully. en loke how mony vnytes ben in e nounbur at comys o
e m{u}ltiplicacio [{16}]And so mony tymes[{16}] o 2 digitt{es} o
ylke articuls, so mony thowsant ben in e nounbre, the qwych comes o e
m{u}ltiplicacio. And so mony tymes ten thowsand schal be in e nounbre
at comes o e m{u}ltiplicacion o 2 articuls, as y {o}u wold wete
qwat is 4 hundryth tymes [two hundryth]. Multiply 4 be 2,[{17}] at wol
be 8. in 8 ben 8 vnites. And so mony tymes ten thousand be in 4
hundryth tymes [2][{17}] hundryth, {a}t is 80 thousand. Take hede,
I schall telle e a gen{e}rall{e} rewle whan {o}u hast 2 articuls, And
ou wold wete qwat comes o e m{u}ltiplicacio o hem 2. m{u}ltiplie e
digit o {a}t on articuls, and kepe at nounbre, en loke how mony
ci ers schuld go be or{e} at on articuls, and he wer{e} write. Als mony
ci ers schuld go be or{e} at other, & he wer{e} write o ci ers. And
haue all{e} e ylke ci ers toged{ur} in i mynde, [*lea 162a] a-rowe
ycho a tur other, and in e last plase set e nounbre at comes o e
m{u}ltiplicacio o e 2 digittes. And loke in i mynde in what place he

stondes, wher{e} in e secunde, or in e thryd, or in e 4, or wher{e}

ellis, and loke qwat e igures by-token in at place; & so mych is e
nounbre at comes o e 2 articuls y-m{u}ltiplied to-ged{ur} as us:
y {o}u wold wete what is 20 thousant tymes 3 owsande. m{u}ltiply e
digit o at articull{e} e quych is 2 by e digitte o at o{er}
articul e quych is 3, at wol be 6. en loke how mony ci ers schal go
to 20 thousant as hit schuld be write in a tabul. c{er}tainly 4 ci ers
schuld go to 20 owsant. or is igure 2 in e yrst place betokenes
twene. In e secunde place hit betokenes twenty. In e 3. place hit
betokenes 2 hundryth. .. In e 4 place 2 thousant. In e 5 place
h{i}t betokenes twenty ousant. {ere} or{e} he most haue 4 ci ers
a- or{e} hym at he may sto{n}de in e 5 place. kepe ese 4 ci ers in
thy mynde, en loke how mony ci ers go to 3 thousant. Certayn to 3
thousante [*lea 162b] go 3 ci ers a or{e}. Now cast ylke 4 ci ers at
schuld go to twenty thousant, And thes 3 ci ers at schuld go a or{e} 3
thousant, & sette hem in rewe ycho a t{er} o{er} in i mynde, as ai
schuld stonde in a tabull{e}. And en schal ou haue 7 ci ers; en sett
at 6 e quych comes o e m{u}ltiplicacio o e 2 digitt{es} a t{u}r
e ylke ci ers in e 8 place as y at hit stode in a tabul. And loke
qwat a igur{e} o 6 schuld betoken in e 8 place. y hit wer{e} in a
tabul & so mych it is. & y at igure o 6 stonde in e yrst place he
schuld betoken but 6. In e 2 place he schuld betoken sexty. In the
3 place he schuld betoke sex hundryth. In e 4 place sex thousant.
In e 5 place sexty owsant. In e sext place sex hundryth owsant.
In e 7 place sex owsant thousant{es}. In e 8 place sexty owsant
thousantes. {er} or{e} sett 6 in octauo loco, And he schal betoken
sexty owsant thousantes. And so mych is twenty owsant tymes 3
thousant, And is rewle is gen{er}all{e} or all{e} man{er} o
articuls, Whethir ai be hundryth or owsant; but {o}u most know well
e cra t o e wryrchyng{e} in e tabull{e} [*lea 163a] or ou know to
do us in i mynde a tur is rewle. Thou most at is rewle holdye note
but wher{e} {ere} ben 2 articuls and no mo o e quych ayther o hem
hase but on igur{e} signi icaty . As twenty tymes 3 thousant or 3
hundryth, and such o{ur}.
Articulum digito si m{u}ltiplicare o{portet}
Articuli digit[i sumi quo multiplicate]
Debem{us} reliquu{m} quod m{u}ltiplicat{ur} ab ill{is}
P{er} reliq{u}o decuplu{m} sic su{m}ma{m} later{e} neq{ui}b{i}t.
[Sidenote: The third case o

the cra t; an example.]

Her{e} he puttes e thryde rewle, e quych is is. y {o}u wel

m{u}ltiply in i mynde, And e Articul be a digitte, ou schalt loke at
e digitt be w{i}t{h}-Inne an hundryth, en ou schalt m{u}ltiply the
digitt o e Articulle by e oer digitte. And eu{er}y vnite in e
nounbre at schall{e} come {ere}-o schal betoken ten. As us: y at
{o}u wold wete qwat is twyes 40. m{u}ltiplie e digitt{e} o 40, e
quych is 4, by e o{er} diget, e quych is 2. And at wolle be 8. And
in e nombre o 8 ben 8 vnites, & eu{er}y o e ylke vnites schuld
stonde or 10. {ere}- ore {ere} schal be 8 tymes 10, at wol be 4
score. And so mony is twyes 40. I e articul be a hundryth or be 2
hundryth And a owsant, so at hit be notte a thousant, [*lea 163b]
worch as o{u} dyddyst a or{e}, saue {o}u schalt rekene eu{er}y vnite
or a hundryth.
In nu{mer}u{m} mixtu{m} digitu{m} si ducer{e} cures
Articul{us} mixti sumat{ur} deinde resoluas
In digitu{m} post ac respectu de digitis
Articul{us}q{ue} docet excrescens in diriua{n}do

In digitu{m} mixti post ducas m{u}ltiplica{n}te{m}

De digitis vt norma [{18}][docet] de [hunc]
Multiplica si{mu}l et sic postea summa patebit.
[Sidenote: The ourth case o the cra t: Composite by digit. Mental
multiplication.]
Here he puttes e 4 rewle, e quych is is: y ou m{u}ltipliy on
composit be a digit as 6 tymes 24, [{19}]en take e diget o at
composit, & m{u}ltiply {a}t digitt by at o{er} diget, and kepe e
nomb{ur} at comes {ere}-o . en take e digit o at composit,
& m{u}ltiply at digit by ano{er} diget, by e quych {o}u hast
m{u}ltiplyed e diget o e articul, and loke qwat comes {ere}-o . en
take {o}u at nounbur, & cast hit to at other nounbur at {o}u
secheste as us y ou wel wete qwat comes o 6 tymes 4 & twenty.
multiply at articull{e} o e composit by e digit, e quych is 6,
as yn e thryd rewle {o}u was taut, And at schal be 6 scor{e}. en
m{u}ltiply e diget o e {com}posit, [*lea 164a] e quych is 4, and
m{u}ltiply at by at other diget, e quych is 6, as ou wast taut in
e irst rewle, y {o}u haue mynde {er}o , & at wol be 4 & twenty.
cast all ylke nounburs to-ged{ir}, & hit schal be 144. And so mych is 6
tymes 4 & twenty.
[Headnote: How to multiply without Figures.]
Duct{us} in articulu{m} num{erus} si {com}posit{us} sit
Articulu{m} puru{m} comites articulu{m} q{u}o{que}
Mixti pro digit{is} post iat [et articulus vt]
Norma iubet [retinendo quod extra dicta ab illis]
Articuli digitu{m} post tu mixtu{m} digitu{m} duc
Re{gula} de digitis nec p{re}cipit articul{us}q{ue}
Ex quib{us} exc{re}scens su{m}me tu iunge p{ri}ori
Sic ma{n}i esta cito iet t{ibi} su{m}ma petita.
[Sidenote: The
An example.]

i th case o

the cra t: Article by Composite.

Her{e} he puttes e 5 rewle, e quych is is: y {o}u wel m{u}ltiply

an Articul be a composit, m{u}ltiplie at Articul by e articul o e
composit, and worch as ou wos taut in e secunde rewle, o e quych
rewle e v{er}se begynnes us. Articulu{m} si p{er} Relicu{m} vis
m{u}ltiplicare. en m{u}ltiply e diget o e composit by at o{ir}
articul a t{ir} e doctrine o e 3 rewle. take {er}o gode hede,
I p{ra}y e as us. Y {o}u wel wete what is 24 tymes ten. Multiplie
ten by 20, at wel be 2 hundryth. en m{u}ltiply e diget o e 10, e
quych is 1, by e diget o e composit, e quych is 4, & {a}t [*lea
164b] wol be 4. en reken eu{er}y vnite at is in 4 or 10, & at schal
be 40. Cast 40 to 2 hundryth, & at wol be 2 hundryth & 40. And so mych
is 24 tymes ten.
[Headnote: How to work without Figures.]
Compositu{m} num{er}u{m} mixto si[c] m{u}ltiplicabis
Vndecies tredeci{m} sic e{st} ex hiis op{er}andum
In reliquu{m} p{rimu}m demu{m} duc post in eund{em}
Vnu{m} post den{u}m duc in t{ri}a dei{n}de p{er} vnu{m}
Multiplices{que} dem{u}m int{ra} o{mn}ia m{u}ltiplicata
In su{m}ma decies q{ua}m si u{er}it t{ibi} doces
Multiplicandor{um} de normis su iciunt h{ec}.

[Sidenote: The sixth case o the cra t: Composite by Composite.

Mental multiplication. An example o the sixth case o the cra t.]
Here he puttes e 6 rewle, & e last o all{e} multiplicacio,
e quych is is: y {o}u wel m{u}ltiplye a {com}posit by a-no{er}
composit, ou schalt do us. m{u}ltiplie {a}t on composit, qwych {o}u
welt o the twene, by e articul o e to{er} composit, as {o}u wer{e}
taut in e 5 rewle, en m{u}ltiplie {a}t same composit, e quych ou
hast m{u}ltiplied by e o{er} articul, by e digit o e o{er}
composit, as {o}u was taut in e 4 rewle. As us, y ou wold wete
what is 11 tymes 13, as {o}u was taut in e 5 rewle, & at schal be an
hundryth & ten, a t{er}warde m{u}ltiply at same co{m}posit {a}t {o}u
hast m{u}ltiplied, e quych is a .11. And m{u}ltiplye hit be e digit o
e o{er} composit, e quych is 3, or 3 is e digit o 13, And at wel
be 30. en take e digit o at composit, e quych composit ou
m{u}ltiplied by e digit o {a}t o{er} {com}posit, [*lea 165a] e
quych is a 11. Also o the quych 11 on is e digit. m{u}ltiplie at
digitt by e digett o at oth{er} composit, e quych diget is 3,
as {o}u was taut in e irst rewle i{n} e begynnyng{e} o is cra t.
e quych rewle begynn{es} In digitu{m} cures. And o all{e} e
m{u}ltiplicacio o e 2 digitt comys thre, or onys 3 is but 3. Now
cast all{e} ese nounbers toged{ur}, the quych is is, a hundryth & ten
& 30 & 3. And al at wel be 143. Write 3 irst in e ryght side. And
cast 10 to 30, at wol be 40. set 40 next a t{ur} towarde e ly t side,
And set a tur a hundryth as her{e} an Ensampull{e}, 143.
(Cetera desunt.)
FOOTNOTES (The Cra te o Nombrynge):
[1: In MS, awiy.]
[2: ben repeated in MS.]
[3: In MS. thausandes.]
[4: Perhaps So.]
[5: hali marked or erasure in MS.]
[6: moy in MS.]
[7: Subt{ra}has a{u}t addis a dext{ri}s {ve}l medi{a}b{is} added
on margin o MS.]
[8: A ter cra t insert the .4. what is e p{ro} et o is cra t.]
[9: A ter sythes insert & is wordes yue sithe & sex sythes.]
[10: tl marked or erasure be ore tyl in MS.]
[11: Here o e same rew is marked or erasure in MS.]
[12: s{ed} deleted in MS.]
[13: 6883 in MS.]
[14: en overwritten on at marked or erasure.]
[15: Supra inserted in MS. in place o ci ra marked or erasure.]
[16--16: Marked or erasure in MS.]
[17: 4 in MS.]
[18: docet. decet MS.]
[19: 4 times 4 in MS.]

+The Art o Nombryng.+

A TRANSLATION OF
+John o

Holywoods De Arte Numerandi.+

[_Ashmole MS. 396,

ol. 48._]

+Boys seying in the begynnyng o his Arsemetrik{e}:--All{e}

[*Fol. 48.] thynges that ben{e} ro the irst begynnyng o thynges
have p{ro}ceded{e}, and come orth{e}, And by reso{u}n o nombre
ben ormed{e}; And in wise as they ben{e}, So oweth{e} they to be
knowen{e}; wher or in vniu{er}sall{e} knowlechyng o thynges the
Art o nombrynge is best, and most operaty {e}.+
[Sidenote: The name o the art. Derivation o Algorism. Another.
Another. Kinds o numbers. The 9 rules o the Art.]
Ther ore sithen the science o the whiche at this tyme we intenden{e} to
write o standith{e} all{e} and about nombre: irst we most se, what is
the p{ro}pre name thero {e}, and ro whens the name come: A terward{e}
what is nombre, And how manye spices o nombre ther ben. The name is
cleped{e} Algorisme, had{e} out o Algor{e}, other o Algos, in grewe,
That is clepid{e} in englissh{e} art other cra t, And o Rithm{us} that
is called{e} nombre. So algorisme is cleped{e} the art o nombryng,
other it is had o {e} en or in, and gogos that is introduccio{u}n, and
Rithm{us} nombre, that is to say Interduccio{u}n o nombre. And thirdly
it is had{e} o the name o a kyng that is cleped{e} Algo and Rythm{us};
So called{e} Algorism{us}. Sothely .2. maner{e} o nombres ben
noti ied{e}; Formall{e},[{1}] as nombr{e} i{s} vnitees gadred{e}
to-gedres; Materiall{e},[{2}] as nombr{e} is a colleccio{u}n o vnitees.
Other nombr{e} is a multitude had{e} out o vnitees, vnitee is that
thynge wher-by eu{er}y thynge is called{e} oone, other o thynge. O
nombres, that one is cleped{e} digitall{e}, that other{e} Article,
Another a nombre componed{e} o{er} myxt. Another digitall{e} is a
nombre w{i}t{h}-in .10.; Article is {a}t nombre that may be dyvyded{e}
in .10. p{ar}ties egally, And that there leve no residue; Componed{e} or
medled{e} is that nombre that is come o a digite and o an article. And
vndrestand{e} wele that all{e} nombres betwix .2. articles next is a
nombr{e} componed{e}. O this art ben{e} .9. spices, that is orto sey,
num{er}acio{u}n, addicio{u}n, Subtraccio{u}n, Mediac{i}o{u}n,
Duplacio{u}n, Multipliacio{u}n, Dyvysio{u}n, Progressio{u}n, And o
Rootes the extraccio{u}n, and that may be had{e} in .2. maners, that is
to sey in nombres quadrat, and in cubic{es}: Amonge the which{e}, irst
o Num{er}acio{u}n, and a t{er}ward{e} o e o{er}s by ordure,
y entende to write.
[Headnote: Chapter I. Numeration.]
[*Fol. 48b]
+For-soth{e} num{er}acio{u}n is o eu{er}y numbre by
competent igures an arti iciall{e} rep{re}sentacio{u}n.+
[Sidenote: Figures, di erences, places, and limits. The 9 igures.
The cipher. The numeration o digits, o articles, o composites.
The value due to position. Numbers are written rom right to le t.]
Sothly igure, di erence, places, and lynes supposen o thyng other the
same, But they ben sette here or dyue{r}s resons. igure is cleped{e}
or p{ro}traccio{u}n o iguracio{u}n; Di erence is called{e} or
therby is shewed{e} eu{er}y igure, how it hath{e} di erence ro the
igures be ore them: place by cause o space, where-in me writeth{e}:

lynees, or that is ordeyned{e} or the p{re}sentacio{u}n o eu{er}y

igure. And vnderstonde that ther ben .9. lymytes o igures that
rep{re}senten the .9. digit{es} that ben these. 0. 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3.
2. 1. The .10. is cleped{e} theta, or a cercle, other a ci re, other a
igure o nought or nought it signy ieth{e}. Nathelesse she holdyng
that place giveth{e} others or to signy ie; or with{e}-out ci re or
ci res a pure article may not be writte. And sithen that by these .9.
igures signi icati {es} Ioyned{e} w{i}t{h} ci re or w{i}t{h} ci res
all{e} nombres ben and may be rep{re}sented{e}, It was, nether is,
no nede to ynde any more igures. And note wele that eu{er}y digite
shall{e} be writte w{i}t{h} oo igure allone to it ap{ro}pred{e}. And
all{e} articles by a ci re, or eu{er}y article is named{e} or oone o
the digitis as .10. o 1.. 20. o . 2. and so o the others, &c. And
all{e} nombres digitall{e} owen to be sette in the irst di erence:
All{e} articles in the seconde. Also all{e} nombres ro .10. til an
.100. [which] is excluded{e}, with .2. igures mvst be writte; And y it
be an article, by a ci re irst put, and the igure y-writte toward{e}
the li t hond{e}, that signi ieth{e} the digit o the which{e} the
article is named{e}; And y it be a nombre componed{e}, irst write the
digit that is a part o that componed{e}, and write to the li t side the
article as it is seid{e} be- ore. All{e} nombre that is ro an
hundred{e} tille a thousand{e} exclused{e}, owith{e} to be writ by .3.
igures; and all{e} nombre that is ro a thousand{e} til .x. M. mvst be
writ by .4. igures; And so orthe. And vnderstond{e} wele that eu{er}y
igure sette in the irst place signy ieth{e} his digit; In the
second{e} place .10. tymes his digit; In the .3. place an hundred{e} so
moche; In the .4. place a thousand{e} so moche; In the .5. place .x.
thousand{e} so moch{e}; In the .6. place an hundred{e} thousand{e} so
moch{e}; In the .7. place a thousand{e} thousand{e}. And so in ynytly
mvltiplying by [*Fol. 49.] these .3. 10, 100, 1000. And vnderstand{e}
wele that competently me may sette vpon igure in the place o a
thousand{e}, a prik{e} to shewe how many thousand{e} the last igure
shall{e} rep{re}sent. We writen{e} in this art to the li t side-ward{e},
as arabien{e} writen{e}, that weren ynders o this science, other{e}
or this reso{u}n, that or to kepe a custumable ordr{e} in redyng,
Sette we all{e}-wey the more nombre be ore.
[Headnote: Chapter II. Addition.]
[Sidenote: De inition. How the numbers should be written. The method
o working. Begin at the right. The Sum is a digit, or an article,
or a composite.]
Addicio{u}n is o nombre other o nombres vnto nombre or to nombres
aggregacio{u}n, that me may see that that is come thero as
exc{re}ssent. In addicio{u}n, 2. ordres o igures and .2. nombres ben
necessary, that is to sey, a nombre to be added{e} and the nombre wherto
the addic{i}oun shold{e} be made to. The nombre to be added{e} is that
at shold{e} be added{e} therto, and shall{e} be vnderwriten; the nombre
vnto the which{e} addicio{u}n shall{e} be made to is that nombre that
resceyueth{e} the addicion o at other, and shall{e} be writen above;
and it is convenient that the lesse nombre be vnderwrit, and the more
added{e}, than the contrary. But whether it happ{e} one other other, the
same comyth{e} o , Ther or, y ow wilt adde nombre to nombre, write the
nombre wherto the addicio{u}n shall{e} be made in the omest ordre by his
di erences, so that the irst o the lower ordre be vndre the irst o
the omyst ordre, and so o others. That done, adde the irst o the
lower ordre to the irst o the omyst ordre. And o such{e} addicio{u}n,
other {er}e grow{i}t{h} thero a digit, An article, other a
composed{e}. I it be digit{us}, In the place o the omyst shalt thow

write the digit excrescyng, as thus:-+----------------------------+---+

|The resultant
| 2 |
+----------------------------+---+
|To whom it shal be added{e} | 1 |
+----------------------------+---+
|The nombre to be added{e} | 1 |
+----------------------------+---+
I the article; in the place o
and the digit trans erred{e}, o
toward{e} the li t side, and be
y ther be any igure olowyng;
the] void{e}, as thus:--

the omyst put a-way by a

e which{e} the article
it added{e} to the next
or no, and y it be not,

ci re writte,
toke his name,
igure olowyng,
leve it [in

+---------------------------------+----+
| The resultant
| 10 |
+---------------------------------+----+
| To whom it shall{e} be added{e} | 7 |
+---------------------------------+----+
| The nombre to be added{e}
| 3 |
+---------------------------------+----+
+----------------------+---+---+---+---+---+
| Resultans
| 2 | 7 | 8 | 2 | 7 |
+----------------------+---+---+---+---+---+
| Cui d{ebet} addi
| 1 | 0 | 0 | 8 | 4 |
+----------------------+---+---+---+---+---+
| Num{erus} addend{us} | 1 | 7 | 7 | 4 | 3 |
+----------------------+---+---+---+---+---+
And y it happe that the igure olowyng wherto the addicio{u}n shall{e}
be made by [the ci re o ] an article, it sette a-side; In his place
write the [*Fol. 49b] [digit o the] Article as thus:-+---------------------------------+----+
| The resultant
| 17 |
+---------------------------------+----+
| To whom it shall{e} be added{e} | 10 |
+---------------------------------+----+
| The nombre to be added{e}
| 7 |
+---------------------------------+----+
And y it happe that a igure o .9. by the igure that me mvst adde
[one] to, In the place o that 9. put a ci re {and} write e article
toward{e} e li t hond{e} as bi ore, and thus:-+---------------------------------+----+
| The resultant
| 10 |
+---------------------------------+----+
| To whom it shall{e} be added{e} | 9 |
+---------------------------------+----+
| The nombre to be added{e}
| 1 |
+---------------------------------+----+
And y [{3}] [there rom grow a] nombre componed,[{4}] [in the place o
the nombre] put a-way[{5}][let] the digit [be][{6}]writ {a}t is part o
{a}t co{m}posid{e}, and an put to e li t side the article as be ore,
and us:--

+---------------------------------+----+
| The resultant
| 12 |
+---------------------------------+----+
| To whom it shall{e} be added{e} | 8 |
+---------------------------------+----+
| The nombre to be added{e}
| 4 |
+---------------------------------+----+
This done, adde the seconde to the second{e}, and write above o{er} as
be ore.
[Sidenote: The translators note.]
Note wele {a}t in addic{i}ons and in all{e} spices olowyng, whan he
seith{e} one the other shall{e} be writen aboue, and me most vse eu{er}
igure, as that eu{er}y igure were sette by hal {e}, and by
hym-sel {e}.
[Headnote: Chapter III. Subtraction.]
[Sidenote: De inition o Subtraction. How it may be done. What is
required. Write the greater number above. Subtract the irst igure
i possible. I it is not possible borrow ten, and then subtract.]
Subtraccio{u}n is o .2. p{ro}posed{e} nombres, the yndyng o the
excesse o the more to the lasse: Other subtraccio{u}n is ablacio{u}n o
o nombre ro a-nother, that me may see a some le t. The lasse o the
more, or even o even, may be w{i}t{h}draw; The more ro the lesse may
neu{er} be. And sothly that nombre is more that hath{e} more igures, So
that the last be signy icati e{s}: And y ther ben as many in that one
as in that other, me most deme it by the last, other by the next last.
More-ou{er} in w{i}t{h}-drawyng .2. nombres ben necessary; A nombre to
be w{i}t{h}draw, And a nombre that me shall{e} w{i}t{h}-draw o . The
nombre to be w{i}t{h}-draw shall{e} be writ in the lower ordre by his
di erences; The nombre ro the which{e} me shall{e} with{e}-draw in the
omyst ordre, so that the irst be vnder the irst, the second{e} vnder
the second{e}, And so o all{e} others. With{e}-draw ther or the irst
o the lower{e} ordre ro the irst o the ordre above his hede, and
that wolle be other more or lesse, o{er} egall{e}.
+---------------------------------+----+
| The remanent
| 20 |
+---------------------------------+----+
| Whero me shall{e} w{i}t{h}draw | 22 |
+---------------------------------+----+
| The nombre to be w{i}t{h}draw | 2 |
+---------------------------------+----+
y it be egall{e} or even the igure sette beside, put in his place a
ci re. And y it be more put away {er} ro als many o vnitees the lower
igure conteyneth{e}, and writ the residue as thus
+----------------------------------+---+---+
| The remanent
| 2 | 2 |
+----------------------------------+---+---+
| Whero me shall{e} w{i}t{h}-draw | 2 | 8 |
+----------------------------------+---+---+
| e nombre to be w{i}t{h}draw
| | 6 |

+----------------------------------+---+---+
[*Fol. 50.]
+--------------------------+---+---+-----+---+---+---+---+---+---+
| Remane{n}s
| 2 | 2 | 1 | 8 | 2 | 9 | 9 | 9 | 8 |
+--------------------------+---+---+-----+---+---+---+---+---+---+
| A quo sit subtraccio
| 8 | 7 | 2 | 4 | 3 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 4 |
+--------------------------+---+---+-----+---+---+---+---+---+---+
| Numerus subt{ra}hend{us} | 6 | 5 |[{7}]|[6]| . | . | . | . | 6 |
+--------------------------+---+---+-----+---+---+---+---+---+---+
And y it be lesse, by-cause the more may not be w{i}t{h}-draw ther- ro,
borow an vnyte o the next igure that is worth{e} 10. O that .10. and
o the igure that ye wold{e} have w{i}t{h}-draw ro be- ore to-gedre
Ioyned{e}, w{i}t{h}-draw e igure be-nethe, and put the residue in the
place o the igure put a-side as {us}:-+----------------------------------+---+---+
| The remanent
| 1 | 8 |
+----------------------------------+---+---+
| Whero me shall{e} w{i}t{h}-draw | 2 | 4 |
+----------------------------------+---+---+
| The nombre to be w{i}t{h}-draw | 0 | 6 |
+----------------------------------+---+---+
[Sidenote: I the second igure is one.]
And y the igure whero me shal borow the vnyte be one, put it a-side,
and write a ci re in the place {er}o , lest the igures olowing aile
o thair{e} nombre, and an worch{e} as it shew{i}t{h} in this igure
here:-+--------------------------------+---+---+------+
| The remanent
| 3 | 0 |9[{8}]|
+--------------------------------+---+---+------+
| Whero me shal w{i}t{h}-draw | 3 | 1 | 2 |
+--------------------------------+---+---+------+
| The nombre to be w{i}t{h}-draw | . | . | 3 |
+--------------------------------+---+---+------+
[Sidenote: I the second igure is a cipher.]
And y the vnyte whero
igure signy icati {e},
the place o eu{er}y ci
.9. as here it is speci

me shal borow be a ci re, go erther to the

and ther borow one, and reto{ur}nyng bak{e}, in
re {a}t ye passid{e} ou{er}, sette igures o
ied{e}:--

+----------------------------------+---+---+---+---+---+
| The remenaunt
| 2 | 9 | 9 | 9 | 9 |
+----------------------------------+---+---+---+---+---+
| Whero me shall{e} w{i}t{h}-draw | 3 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 3 |
+----------------------------------+---+---+---+---+---+
| The nombre to be w{i}t{h}-draw | | | | | 4 |
+----------------------------------+---+---+---+---+---+
[Sidenote: A justi ication o the rule given. Why it is better to
work rom right to le t. How to prove subtraction, and addition.]
And whan me cometh{e} to the nombre whero

me intendith{e}, there

remayneth{e} all{e}-wayes .10. or e which{e} .10. &c. The reson why

at or eu{er}y ci re le t behynde me setteth igures ther o .9. this
it is:--I ro the .3. place me borowed{e} an vnyte, that vnyte by
respect o the igure that he came ro rep{re}sentith an .C., In the
place o that ci re [passed over] is le t .9., [which is worth ninety],
and yit it remayneth{e} as .10., And the same reson{e} wold{e} be y me
had{e} borowed{e} an vnyte ro the .4., .5., .6., place, or ony other so
vpward{e}. This done, withdraw the second{e} o the lower ordre ro the
igure above his hede o e omyst ordre, and wirch{e} as be ore. And
note wele that in addicion or in subtracc{i}o{u}n me may wele ro the
li t side begynne and ryn to the right side, But it wol be more
p{ro} itabler to be do, as it is taught. And y thow wilt p{ro}ve y
thow have do wele or no, The igures that thow hast withdraw, adde them
ayene to the omyst igures, and they wolle accorde w{i}t{h} the irst
that thow haddest y thow have labored wele; and in like wise in
addicio{u}n, whan thow hast added{e} all{e} thy igures, w{i}t{h}draw
them that thow irst [*Fol. 50b] addest, and the same wolle reto{ur}ne.
The subtraccio{u}n is none other but a p{ro}u {e} o the addicio{u}n,
and the contrarye in like wise.
[Headnote: Chapter IV. Mediation.]
[Sidenote: De inition o mediation. Where to begin. I
igure is unity. What to do i it is not unity.]

the irst

Mediacio{u}n is the yndyng o the hal yng o eu{er}y nombre, that it

may be seyn{e} what and how moch{e} is eu{er}y hal {e}. In hal yng ay oo
order o igures and oo nombre is necessary, that is to sey the nombre
to be hal ed{e}. Ther or y thow wilt hal any nombre, write that nombre
by his di erences, and begynne at the right, that is to sey, ro the
irst igure to the right side, so that it be signy icati {e} other
rep{re}sent vnyte or eny other digitall{e} nombre. I it be vnyte write
in his place a ci re or the igures olowyng, [lest they signi y less],
and write that vnyte w{i}t{h}out in the table, other resolue it in .60.
mynvt{es} and sette a-side hal o tho m{inutes} so, and reserve the
remen{au}nt w{i}t{h}out in the table, as thus .30.; other sette
w{i}t{h}out thus .{d}: that kepeth{e} none ordre o place, Nathelesse
it hath{e} signy icacio{u}n. And y the other igure signy ie any other
digital nombre ro vnyte orth{e}, o{er} the nombre is od{e} or
even{e}. I it be even, write this hal in this wise:-+-----------------+---+---+
| Hal ed{e}
| 2 | 2 |
+-----------------+----+--+
| to be hal ed{e} | 4 | 4 |
+-----------------+---+---+
And i it be odde, Take the next even vndre hym conteyned{e}, and put
his hal in the place o that odde, and o e vnyte that remayneth{e} to
be hal ed{e} do thus:-+-----------------+---+---+
| hal ed{e}
| 2 | 3 | [di]
+-----------------+---+---+
| To be hal ed{e} | 4 | 7 |
+-----------------+---+---+
[Sidenote: Then halve the second igure. I it is odd, add 5 to the
igure be ore.]

This done, the second{e} is to be hal ed{e}, y it be a ci re put it

be-side, and y it be signi icati {e}, other it is even or od{e}: I it
be even, write in the place o e nombres wiped{e} out the hal {e}; y
it be od{e}, take the next even vnder it co{n}tenyth{e}, and in the
place o the Impar sette a-side put hal o the even: The vnyte that
remayneth{e} to be hal ed{e}, respect had{e} to them be ore, is worth{e}
.10. Dyvide that .10. in .2., 5. is, and sette a-side that one, and adde
that other to the next igure p{re}cedent as here:-+-----------------+---+---+---+
| Hal ed{e}
| | | |
+-----------------+---+---+---+
| to be hal ed{e} | | | |
+-----------------+---+---+---+
And y e addicio{u}n shold{e} be made to a ci re, sette it a-side, and
write in his place .5. And vnder this o{ur}me me shall{e} write and
worch{e}, till{e} the totall{e} nombre be hal ed{e}.
+------------------+---+---+---+---+---+----+----+---+
| doubled{e}
| 2 | 6 | 8 | 9 | 0 | 10 | 17 | 4 |
+------------------+---+---+---+---+---+----+----+---+
| to be doubled{e} | 1 | 3 | 4 | 4 | 5 | 5 | 8 | 7 |
+------------------+---+---+---+---+---+----+----+---+
[Headnote: Chapter V. Duplation.]
[Sidenote: De inition o Duplation. Where to begin. Why. What to do
with the result.]
Duplicacio{u}n is ag{re}gacion o nombre [to itsel ] at me may se the
nombre growen. In doublyng{e} ay is but one ordre o igures necessarie.
And me most be-gynne w{i}t{h} the li t side, other o the more igure,
And a ter the nombre o the more igure rep{re}sentith{e}. [*Fol. 51.]
In the other .3. be ore we begynne all{e} way ro the right side and ro
the lasse nombre, In this spice and in all{e} other olowyng we wolle
begynne ro the li t side, or and me bigon th{e} double ro the irst,
omwhile me myght double oo thynge twyes. And how be it that me myght
double ro the right, that wold{e} be harder in techyng and in workyng.
Ther or y thow wolt double any nombre, write that nombre by his
di erences, and double the last. And o that doubly{n}g other
growith{e} a nombre digital, article, or componed{e}. [I it be a digit,
write it in the place o the irst digit.] I it be article, write in
his place a ci re and trans erre the article toward{e} the li t, as
thus:-+------------------+----+
| double
| 10 |
+------------------+----+
| to be doubled{e} | 5 |
+------------------+----+
And y the nombre be componed{e}, write a digital that is part o his
composicio{u}n, and sette the article to the li t hand{e}, as thus:-+------------------+----+
| doubled{e}
| 16 |
+------------------+----+
| to be doubled{e} | 8 |
+------------------+----+

That done, me most double the last save one, and what
me most worche as be ore. And y a ci re be, touch{e}
nombre shall{e} be added{e} to the ci re, in e place
wiped{e} out me most write the nombre to be added{e},

groweth{e} {er}o
it not. But y any
o e igure
as thus:--

+------------------+---+---+---+
| doubled{e}
| 6 | 0 | 6 |
+------------------+---+---+---+
| to be doubled{e} | 3 | 0 | 3 |
+------------------+---+---+---+
[Sidenote: How to prove your answer.]
In the same wise me shall{e} wirch{e} o all{e} others. And this
p{ro}bacio{u}n: I thow truly double the hal is, and truly hal the
doubles, the same nombre and igure shall{e} mete, such{e} as thow
labo{ur}ed{e} vpon{e} irst, And o the contrarie.
+------------------+---+---+---+
| Doubled{e}
| 6 | 1 | 8 |
+------------------+---+---+---+
| to be doubled{e} | 3 | 0 | 9 |
+------------------+---+---+---+
[Headnote: Chapter VI. Multiplication.]
[Sidenote: De inition o Multiplication. Multiplier. Multiplicand.
Product.]
Multiplicacio{u}n o nombre by hym-sel other by a-nother, w{i}t{h}
p{ro}posid{e} .2. nombres, [is] the yndyng o the third{e}, That so
o t conteyneth{e} that other, as ther ben vnytes in the o{er}. In
multiplicacio{u}n .2. nombres pryncipally ben necessary, that is to
sey, the nombre multiplying and the nombre to be multiplied{e},
as here;--twies yve. [The number multiplying] is designed{e}
adu{er}bially. The nombre to be multiplied{e} resceyveth{e} a
no{m}i{n}all{e} appellacio{u}n, as twies .5. 5. is the nombre
multiplied{e}, and twies is the nombre to be multipliede.
+-----------------+-----+---+---++---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
| Resultans
|[{9}]| 1 | 0 || 1 | 3 | 2 | 6 | 6 | 8 | 0 | 0 | 8 |
+-----------------+-----+---+---++---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
| Multiplicand{us}| . | . | 5 || . | . | 4 | . | 3 | 4 | 0 | 0 | 4 |
+-----------------+-----+---+---++---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
| Multiplicans
| . | 2 | 2 || . | 3 | 3 | 2 | 2 | 2 | . | . | . |
+-----------------+-----+---+---++---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
Also me may thervpon{e} to assigne the. 3. nombre, the which{e} is
[*Fol. 51b] cleped{e} p{ro}duct or p{ro}venient, o takyng out o one
ro another: as twyes .5 is .10., 5. the nombre to be multiplied{e},
and .2. the multipliant, and. 10. as be ore is come thero . And
vnderstonde wele, that o the multipliant may be made the nombre to
be multiplied{e}, and o the contrarie, remaynyng eu{er} the same some,
and hero {e} cometh{e} the comen speche, that seith{e} all nombre is
converted{e} by Multiplying in hym-sel {e}.
+----+----+----+----+----+--------+----+----+----+-----+
| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6
| 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 |
+----+----+----+----+----+--------+----+----+----+-----+

| 2 | 4 | 6 | 8 | 10 |10[{10}]| 14 | 16 | 18 | 20 |
+----+----+----+----+----+--------+----+----+----+-----+
| 3 | 6 | 9 | 12 | 15 | 18
| 21 | 24 | 27 | 30 |
+----+----+----+----+----+--------+----+----+----+-----+
| 4 | 8 | 12 | 16 | 20 | 24
| 28 | 32 | 36 | 40 |
+----+----+----+----+----+--------+----+----+----+-----+
| 5 | 10 | 15 | 20 | 25 | 30
| 35 | 40 | 45 | 50 |
+----+----+----+----+----+--------+----+----+----+-----+
| 6 | 12 | 18 | 24 | 30 | 36
| 42 | 48 | 56 | 60 |
+----+----+----+----+----+--------+----+----+----+-----+
| 7 | 14 | 21 | 28 | 35 | 42
| 49 | 56 | 63 | 70 |
+----+----+----+----+----+--------+----+----+----+-----+
| 8 | 16 | 24 | 32 | 40 | 48
| 56 | 64 | 72 | 80 |
+----+----+----+----+----+--------+----+----+----+-----+
| 9 | 18 | 27 | 36 | 45 | 54
| 63 | 72 | 81 | 90 |
+----+----+----+----+----+--------+----+----+----+-----+
| 10 | 20 | 30 | 40 | 50 | 60
| 70 | 80 | 90 | 100 |
+----+----+----+----+----+--------+----+----+----+-----+
[Headnote: The Cases o Multiplication.]
[Sidenote: There are 6 rules o Multiplication. (1) Digit by digit.
See the table above. (2) Digit by article. (3) Composite by digit.]
And ther ben .6 rules o Multiplicacio{u}n; irst, y a digit multiplie
a digit, considr{e} how many o vnytees ben betwix the digit by
multiplying and his .10. beth{e} to-gedre accompted{e}, and so o t
w{i}t{h}-draw the digit multiplying, vnder the article o his
deno{m}i{n}acio{u}n. Example o grace. I thow wolt wete how moch{e} is
.4. tymes .8., [{11}]se how many vnytees ben betwix .8.[{12}] and .10.
to-geder rekened{e}, and it shew{i}t{h} that .2.: withdraw ther- or the
quat{e}rnary, o the article o his deno{m}i{n}acion twies, o .40., And
ther remayneth{e} .32., that is, to some o all{e} the
multiplicacio{u}n. Wher-vpon or more evidence and declaracion the
seid{e} table is made. Whan a digit multiplieth{e} an article, thow most
bryng the digit into e digit, o e which{e} the article [has][{13}]
his name, and eu{er}y vnyte shall{e} stond{e} or .10., and eu{er}y
article an .100. Whan the digit multiplieth{e} a nombre componed{e},
{o}u most bryng the digit into ai{er} part o the nombre componed{e},
so {a}t digit be had into digit by the irst rule, into an article by
e second{e} rule; and a t{er}ward{e} Ioyne the p{ro}duccio{u}n, and
{er}e wol be the some totall{e}.
+----------------+---+---+--++---+---+--++---+---+--++---+---+---+---+
|Resultans
| 1 | 2 | 6|| 7 | 3 | 6|| 1 | 2 | 0|| 1 | 2 | 0 | 8 |
+----------------+---+---+--++---+---+--++---+---+--++---+---+---+---+
|Multiplicand{us}| | | 2|| | 3 | 2|| | | 6|| | | | 4 |
+----------------+---+---+--++---+---+--++---+---+--++---+---+---+---+
|Multiplicans
| | 6 | 3|| 2 | 3 | || | 2 | 0|| | 3 | 0 | 2 |
+----------------+---+---+--++---+---+--++---+---+--++---+---+---+---+
[Sidenote: (4) Article by article. (5) Composite by article.
(6) Composite by composite. How to set down your numbers. I the
result is a digit, an article, or a composite. Multiply next by
the last but one, and so on.]
Whan an article multiplieth{e} an article, the digit whero he is
named{e} is to be brought Into the digit whero the o{er} is named{e},
and eu{er}y vnyte wol be worth{e} [*Fol. 52.] an .100., and eu{er}y
article. a .1000. Whan an article multiplieth{e} a nombre componed{e},

thow most bryng the digit o the article into aither part o the nombre
componed{e}; and Ioyne the p{ro}duccio{u}n, and eu{er}y article wol be
worth{e} .100., and eu{er}y vnyte .10., and so woll{e} the some be
open{e}. Whan a nombre componed{e} multiplieth{e} a nombre componed{e},
eu{er}y p{ar}t o the nombre multiplying is to be had{e} into eu{er}y
p{ar}t o the nombre to be multiplied{e}, and so shall{e} the digit be
had{e} twies, onys in the digit, that other in the article. The article
also twies, ones in the digit, that other in the article. Ther or y
thow wilt any nombre by hym-sel other by any other multiplie, write the
nombre to be multiplied{e} in the ou{er} ordre by his di erences, The
nombre multiplying in the lower ordre by his di erences, so that the
irst o the lower ordre be vnder the last o the ou{er} ordre. This
done, o the multiplying, the last is to be had{e} into the last o the
nombre to be multiplied{e}. Whero than wolle grow a digit, an article,
other a nombre componed{e}. I it be a digit, even above the igure
multiplying is hede write his digit that come o , as it appereth{e}
here:-+-----------------------+---+
| The resultant
| 6 |
+-----------------------+---+
| To be multiplied{e} | 3 |
+-----------------------+---+
| e nombre multipliyng | 2 |
+-----------------------+---+
And y an article had be writ ou{er} the ig{ur}e multiplying his hede,
put a ci re {er} and trans erre the article toward{e} the li t hand{e},
as thus:-+-------------------------+---+---+
| The resultant
| 1 | 0 |
+-------------------------+---+---+
| to be multiplied{e}
| | 5 |
+-------------------------+---+---+
| e nombre m{u}ltipliyng | | 2 |
+-------------------------+---+---+
And y a nombre componed{e} be writ ou{er} the igure multyplying is
hede, write the digit in the nombre componed{e} is place, and sette the
article to the li t hand{e}, as thus:-+------------------------+---+---+
| Resultant
| 1 | 2 |
+------------------------+---+---+
| to be multiplied{e}
| | 4 |
+------------------------+---+---+
| the nombre multipliyng | | 3 |
+------------------------+---+---+
This done, me most bryng the last save one o the multipliyng into the
last o e nombre to be multiplied{e}, and se what comyth{e} thero as
be ore, and so do w{i}t{h} all{e}, tille me come to the irst o the
nombre multiplying, that must be brought into the last o the nombre to
be multiplied{e}, whero growith{e} o{er} a digit, an article, [*Fol.
52b] other a nombre componed{e}. I it be a digit, In the place o the
ou{er}er, sette a-side, as here:
+--------------------------+---+---+
| Resultant
| 6 | 6 |

+--------------------------+---+---+
| to be multiplied{e}
| | 3 |
+--------------------------+---+---+
| the nombre m{u}ltipliyng | 2 | 2 |
+--------------------------+---+---+
I an article happe, there put a ci re in his place, and put hym to the
li t hand{e}, as here:
+-------------------------+---+---+---+
| The resultant
| 1 | 1 | 0 |
+-------------------------+---+---+---+
| to be multiplied{e}
| | | 5 |
+-------------------------+---+---+---+
| e nombre m{u}ltiplying | | 2 | 2 |
+-------------------------+---+---+---+
I it be a nombre componed{e}, in the place o the ou{er}er sette
a-side, write a digit that[{14}] is a p{ar}t o the componed{e}, and
sette on the le t hond{e} the article, as here:
+-----------------------------+---+-------+---+
| The resultant
| 1 |3[{15}]| 2 |
+-----------------------------+---+-------+---+
| to be m{u}ltiplied{e}
| |
| 4 |
+-----------------------------+---+-------+---+
| e nombr{e} m{u}ltiplia{n}t | | 3 | 3 |
+-----------------------------+---+-------+---+
[Sidenote: Then antery the multiplier one place. Work as be ore.
How to deal with ciphers.]
That done, sette orward{e} the igures o the nombre multiplying by oo
di erence, so that the irst o the multipliant be vnder the last save
one o the nombre to be multiplied{e}, the other by o place sette
orward{e}. Than me shall{e} bryng{e} the last o the m{u}ltipliant in
hym to be multiplied{e}, vnder the which{e} is the irst multipliant.
And than wolle growe o{er} a digit, an article, or a componed{e}
nombre. I it be a digit, adde hym even above his hede; I it be an
article, trans erre hym to the li t side; And i it be a nombre
componed{e}, adde a digit to the igure above his hede, and sette to the
li t hand{e} the article. And all{e}-wayes eu{er}y igure o the nombre
multipliant is to be brought to the last save one nombre to be
multiplied{e}, til me come to the irst o the multipliant, where me
shall{e} wirche as it is seid{e} be ore o the irst, and a t{er}ward{e}
to put orward{e} the igures by o di erence and one till{e} they
all{e} be multiplied{e}. And y it happe that the irst igure o e
multipliant be a ci re, and boue it is sette the igure signy icati {e},
write a ci re in the place o the igur{e} sette a-side, as thus,
{et}c.:
+---------------------+---+---+---+
| The resultant
| 1 | 2 | 0 |
+---------------------+---+---+---+
| to be multiplied{e} | | | 6 |
+---------------------+---+---+---+
| the multipliant
| | 2 | 0 |
+---------------------+---+---+---+
[Sidenote: How to deal with ciphers.]

And y a ci re happe in the lower order be-twix the irst and the last,
and even above be sette the ig{ur}e signy icati , leve it vntouched{e},
as here:-+---------------------+---+---+---+---+---+
| The resultant
| 2 | 2 | 6 | 4 | 4 |
+---------------------+---+---+---+---+---+
| To be multiplied{e} | | | 2 | 2 | 2 |
+---------------------+---+---+---+---+---+
| The multipliant
| 1 | 0 | 2 | | |
+---------------------+---+---+---+---+---+
And y the space above sette be void{e}, in that place write thow a
ci re. And y the ci re happe betwix e irst and the last to be
m{u}ltiplied{e}, me most sette orward{e} the ordre o the igures by
thair{e} di erences, or o t o duccio{u}n o igur{e}s in ci res
nought is the resultant, as here,
+-----------------------+---+---+---+---+---+
| Resultant
| 8 | 0 | 0 | 8 | |
+-----------------------+---+---+---+---+---+
| to be m{u}ltiplied{e} | 4 | 0 | 0 | 4 | |
+-----------------------+---+---+---+---+---+
| the m{u}ltipliant
| 2 | . | . | . | |
+-----------------------+---+---+---+---+---+
[*Fol. 53.] whero it is evident and open, y that the irst igure o
the nombre be to be multiplied{e} be a ci re, vndir it shall{e} be none
sette as here:-+-----------------------+---+---+--------+
| Resultant
| 3 | 2 |0[{16}] |
+-----------------------+---+---+--------+
| To be m{u}ltiplied{e} | | 8 | 0
|
+-----------------------+---+---+--------+
| The m{u}ltipliant
| | 4 |
|
+-----------------------+---+---+--------+
[Sidenote: Leave room between the rows o

igures.]

Vnder[stand] also that in multiplicacio{u}n, divisio{u}n, and o rootis

the extraccio{u}n, competently me may leve a mydel space betwix .2.
ordres o igures, that me may write there what is come o addyng other
with{e}-drawyng, lest any thynge shold{e} be ou{er}-hipped{e} and sette
out o mynde.
[Headnote: Chapter VII. Division.]
[Sidenote: De inition o division. Dividend, Divisor, Quotient.
How to set down your Sum. An example. Examples.]
For to dyvyde oo nombre by a-nother, it is o .2. nombres p{ro}posed{e},
It is orto depart the moder nombre into as many p{ar}tis as ben o
vnytees in the lasse nombre. And note wele that in makyng{e} o
dyvysio{u}n ther ben .3. nombres necessary: that is to sey, the nombre
to be dyvyded{e}; the nombre dyvydyng and the nombre exeant, other how
o t, or quocient. Ay shall{e} the nombre that is to be dyvyded{e} be
more, other at the lest even{e} w{i}t{h} the nombre the dyvysere, y the
nombre shall{e} be mad{e} by hole nombres. Ther or y thow wolt any

nombre dyvyde, write the nombre to be dyvyded{e} in e ou{er}er

bordur{e} by his di erences, the dyviser{e} in the lower ordur{e} by
his di erences, so that the last o the dyviser be vnder the last o
the nombre to be dyvyde, the next last vnder the next last, and so o
the others, y it may competently be done; as here:-+------------------+---+---+---+
| The residue
| | 2 | 7 |
+------------------+---+---+---+
| The quotient
| | | 5 |
+------------------+---+---+---+
| To be dyvyded{e} | 3 | 4 | 2 |
+------------------+---+---+---+
| The dyvyser
| | 6 | 3 |
+------------------+---+---+---+
+--------------+---+---+----+---+---++---+---+---++---+---+---+
| Residuu{m} | | | 8 || | || | 2 | 7 || | 2 | 6 |
+--------------+---+---+---++---+---++---+---+---++---+---+---+
| Quociens
| | 2 | 1 || 2 | 2 || | | 5 || | | 9 |
+--------------+---+---+---++---+---++---+---+---++---+---+---+
| Diuidend{us} | 6 | 8 | 0 || 6 | 6 || 3 | 4 | 2 || 3 | 3 | 2 |
+--------------+---+---+---++---+---++---+---+---++---+---+---+
| Diuiser
| 3 | 2 | || 3 | || | 6 | 3 || | 3 | 4 |
+--------------+---+---+---++---+---++---+---+---++---+---+---+
[Sidenote: When the last o the divisor must not be set below the
last o the dividend. How to begin.]
And ther ben .2. causes whan the last igure may not be sette vnder the
last, other that the last o the lower nombre may not be w{i}t{h}-draw
o the last o the ou{er}er nombre or it is lasse than the lower, other
how be it, that it myght be w{i}t{h}-draw as or hym-sel ro the
ou{er}er the remenaunt may not so o t o them above, other y e last o
the lower be even to the igure above his hede, and e next last o{er}
the igure be- ore {a}t be more an the igure above sette. [*Fol.
53^2.] These so ordeyned{e}, me most wirch{e} rom the last igure o e
nombre o the dyvyser, and se how o t it may be w{i}t{h}-draw o and ro
the igure aboue his hede, namly so that the remen{au}nt may be take o
so o t, and to se the residue as here:-[Sidenote: An example.]
+------------------+---+---+---+
| The residue
| | 2 | 6 |
+------------------+---+---+---+
| The quocient
| | | 9 |
+------------------+---+---+---+
| To be dyvyded{e} | 3 | 3 | 2 |
+------------------+---+---+---+
| The dyvyser
| | 3 | 4 |
+------------------+---+---+---+
[Sidenote: Where to set the quotiente. Examples.]
And note wele that me may not with{e}-draw more than .9. tymes nether
lasse than ones. Ther or se how o t e igures o the lower ordre may be
w{i}t{h}-draw ro the igures o the ou{er}er, and the nombre that
shew{i}t{h} e q{u}ocient most be writ ou{er} the hede o at igure,
vnder the which{e} the irst igure is, o the dyviser; And by that

igure me most with{e}-draw all{e} o{er}

that o the igures aboue thair{e} hedis.
orward{e} e igures o the diuiser by o
right hond{e} and worch{e} as be ore; and

igures o the lower ordir and

This so don{e}, me most sette
di erence toward{es} the
thus:--

+--------------+---+---+---+---+---+---++---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
| Residuu{m} | | | | | | || | | | | . | 1 | 2 |
+--------------+---+---+---+---+---+---++---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
| quo{ciens} | | | | 6 | 5 | 4 || | | | 2 | 0 | 0 | 4 |
+--------------+---+---+---+---+---+---++---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
| Diuidend{us} | 3 | 5 | 5 | 1 | 2 | 2 || 8 | 8 | 6 | 3 | 7 | 0 | 4 |
+--------------+---+---+---+---+---+---++---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
| Diuisor
| | 5 | 4 | 3 | | || 4 | 4 | 2 | 3 | | | |
+--------------+---+---+---+---+---+---++---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
+------------------+---+---+---+---+---+---+
| The quocient
| | | | 6 | 5 | 4 |
+------------------+---+---+---+---+---+---+
| To be dyvyded{e} | 3 | 5 | 5 | 1 | 2 | 2 |
+------------------+---+---+---+---+---+---+
| The dyvyser
| | 5 | 4 | 3 | | |
+------------------+---+---+---+---+---+---+
[Sidenote: A special case.]
And y it happ{e} a ter e settyng orward{e} o the ig{ur}es {a}t e
last o the divisor may not so o t be w{i}t{h}draw o the ig{ur}e above
his hede, above at ig{ur}e vnder the which{e} the irst o the diuiser
is writ me most sette a ci re in ordre o the nombre quocient, and sette
the ig{ur}es orward{e} as be- ore be o di erence alone, and so me
shall{e} do in all{e} nombres to be dyvided{e}, or where the dyviser
may not be w{i}t{h}-draw me most sette there a ci re, and sette
orward{e} the igures; as here:-+------------------+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
| The residue
| | | | | | 1 | 2 |
|------------------+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
| The quocient
| | | | 2 | 0 | 0 | 4 |
|------------------+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
| To be dyvyded{e} | 8 | 8 | 6 | 3 | 7 | 0 | 4 |
|------------------+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
| The dyvyser
| 4 | 4 | 2 | 3 | | | |
+------------------+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+
[Sidenote: Another example. What the quotient shows. How to prove
your division, or multiplication.]
And me shall{e} not cesse ro such{e} settyng o ig{ur}es orward{e},
nether o settyng{e} o e quocient into the dyviser, ne{er} o
subt{ra}ccio{u}n o the dyvyser, till{e} the irst o the dyvyser be
w{i}t{h}-draw ro e irst to be divided{e}. The which{e} don{e}, or
ought,[{17}] o{er} nought shall{e} remayne: and y it be ought,[{17}]
kepe it in the tables, And eu{er} vny it to e diviser. And y {o}u
wilt wete how many vnytees o e divisio{u}n [*Fol. 53^3.] wol growe to
the nombre o the diviser{e}, the nombre quocient wol shewe it: and whan
such{e} divisio{u}n is made, and {o}u lust p{ro}ve y thow have wele
done or no, Multiplie the quocient by the diviser, And the same
ig{ur}es wolle come ayene that thow haddest bi ore and none other. And
y ought be residue, than w{i}t{h} addicio{u}n thero shall{e} come the
same igures: And so multiplicacio{u}n p{ro}vith{e} divisio{u}n, and

dyvisio{u}n multiplicacio{u}n: as thus, y multiplicacio{u}n be made,

divide it by the multipliant, and the nombre quocient wol shewe the
nombre that was to be multiplied{e}, {et}c.
[Headnote: Chapter VIII. Progression.]
[Sidenote: De inition o Progression. Natural Progression. Broken
Progression. The 1st rule or Natural Progression. The second rule.
The irst rule o Broken Progression. The second rule.]
Progressio{u}n is o nombre a ter egall{e} excesse ro oone or tweyn{e}
take ag{r}egacio{u}n. o p{ro}gressio{u}n one is naturell{e} or
co{n}tynuell{e}, {a}t o{er} broken and discontynuell{e}. Naturell{e}
it is, whan me begynneth{e} w{i}t{h} one, and kepeth{e} ordure
ou{er}lepyng one; as .1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6., {et}c., so {a}t the nombre
olowyng{e} passith{e} the other be- ore in one. Broken it is, whan me
lepith{e} ro o nombre till{e} another, and kepith{e} not the contynuel
ordir{e}; as 1. 3. 5. 7. 9, {et}c. Ay me may begynne w{i}t{h} .2., as
us; .2. 4. 6. 8., {et}c., and the nombre olowyng passeth{e} the others
by- ore by .2. And note wele, that naturell{e} p{ro}gressio{u}n ay
begynneth{e} w{i}t{h} one, and Int{er}cise or broken p{ro}gressio{u}n,
omwhile begynnyth{e} w{i}th one, omwhile w{i}t{h} twayn{e}. O
p{ro}gressio{u}n naturell .2. rules ther be yove, o the which{e} the
irst is this; whan the p{ro}gressio{u}n naturell{e} endith{e} in even
nombre, by the hal thero multiplie e next totall{e} ou{er}er{e}
nombre; Example o grace: .1. 2. 3. 4. Multiplie .5. by .2. and so .10.
cometh{e} o , that is the totall{e} nombre {er}o . The second{e} rule
is such{e}, whan the p{ro}gressio{u}n naturell{e} endith{e} in nombre
od{e}. Take the more porcio{u}n o the oddes, and multiplie therby the
totall{e} nombre. Example o grace 1. 2. 3. 4. 5., multiplie .5. by .3,
and thryes .5. shall{e} be resultant. so the nombre totall{e} is .15. O
p{ro}gresio{u}n int{er}cise, ther ben also .2.[{18}] rules; and e irst
is is: Whan the Int{er}cise p{ro}gression endith{e} in even nombre by
hal thero multiplie the next nombre to at hal {e} as .2.[{18}] 4. 6.
Multiplie .4. by .3. so at is thryes .4., and .12. the nombre o all{e}
the p{ro}gressio{u}n, woll{e} olow. The second{e} rule is this: whan
the p{ro}gressio{u}n int{er}scise endith{e} in od{e}, take e more
porcio{u}n o all{e} e nombre, [*Fol. 53^4.] and multiplie by
hym-sel {e}; as .1. 3. 5. Multiplie .3. by hym-sel {e}, and e some o
all{e} wolle be .9., {et}c.
[Headnote: Chapter IX. Extraction o

Roots.]

[Sidenote: The preamble o the extraction o roots. Linear,

super icial, and solid numbers. Super icial numbers. Square numbers.
The root o a square number. Notes o some examples o square roots
here interpolated. Solid numbers. Three dimensions o solids. Cubic
numbers. All cubics are solid numbers. No number may be both linear
and solid. Unity is not a number.]
Here olowith{e} the extraccio{u}n o rotis, and irst in nombre
q{ua}drat{es}. Wher or me shall{e} se what is a nombre quadrat, and what
is the rote o a nombre quadrat, and what it is to draw out the rote o
a nombre. And be ore other note this divisio{u}n: O nombres one is
lyneal, ano{er} sup{er} iciall{e}, ano{er} quadrat, ano{er} cubik{e}
or hoole. lyneal is that at is considred{e} a ter the p{ro}cesse,
havyng{e} no respect to the direccio{u}n o nombre in nombre, As a lyne
hath{e} but one dymensio{u}n that is to sey a ter the length{e}. Nombre
sup{er} icial is {a}t cometh{e} o ledyng{e} o oo nombre into
a-nother, wher or it is called{e} sup{er} icial, or it hath{e} .2.

nombres notyng or mesuryng{e} hym, as a sup{er} iciall{e} thyng{e}

hath{e} .2. dimensions, {a}t is to sey length{e} and brede. And or
bycause a nombre may be had{e} in a-nother by .2. man{er}s, {a}t is to
sey other in hym-sel {e}, o{er} in ano{er}, Vnderstond{e} y it be had
in hym-sel , It is a quadrat. or dyvisio{u}n write by vnytes, hath{e}
.4. sides even as a quadrangill{e}. and y the nombre be had{e} in
a-no{er}, the nombre is sup{er} iciel and not quadrat, as .2. had{e} in
.3. maketh{e} .6. that is e irst nombre sup{er} iciell{e}; wher or it
is open at all{e} nombre quadrat is sup{er} iciel, and not
co{n}u{er}tid{e}. The rote o a nombre quadrat is at nombre that is had
o hym-sel , as twies .2. makith{e} 4. and .4. is the irst nombre
quadrat, and 2. is his rote. 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. / The rote o
the more quadrat .3. 1. 4. 2. 6. The most nombre quadrat 9. 8. 7. 5.
9. 3. 4. 7. 6. / the remenent ou{er} the quadrat .6. 0. 8. 4. 5. / The
irst caas o nombre quadrat .5. 4. 7. 5. 6. The rote .2. 3. 4. The
second{e} caas .3. 8. 4. 5. The rote .6. 2. The third{e} caas .2. 8. 1.
9. The rote .5. 3. The .4. caas .3. 2. 1. The rote .1. 7. / The 5. caas
.9. 1. 2. 0. 4. / The rote 3. 0. 2. The solid{e} nombre or cubik{e} is
at {a}t comyte o double ledyng o nombre in nombre; And it is
cleped{e} a solid{e} body that hath{e} {er}-in .3 [dimensions] at is
to sey, length{e}, brede, and thiknesse. so {a}t nombre hath{e} .3.
nombres to be brought orth{e} in hym. But nombre may be had{e} twies in
nombre, or other it is had{e} in hym-sel {e}, o{er} in a-no{er}. I a
nombre be had{e} twies in hym-sel , o{er} ones in his quadrat, {a}t is
the same, {a}t a cubik{e} [*Fol. 54.] is, And is the same that is
solide. And y a nombre twies be had{e} in a-no{er}, the nombre is
cleped{e} solide and not cubik{e}, as twies .3. and {a}t .2. makith{e}
.12. Wher or it is opyn{e} that all{e} cubik{e} nombre is solid{e}, and
not {con}u{er}tid{e}. Cubik{e} is {a}t nombre at comyth{e} o
ledyng{e} o hym-sel {e} twyes, or ones in his quadrat. And here-by it
is open that o nombre is the roote o a quadrat and o a cubik{e}.
Natheles the same nombre is not q{ua}drat and cubik{e}. Opyn{e} it is
also that all{e} nombres may be a rote to a q{ua}drat and cubik{e}, but
not all{e} nombre quadrat or cubik{e}. Ther or sithen e ledyng{e} o
vnyte in hym-sel ones or twies nought cometh{e} but vnytes, Seith{e}
Boice in Arsemetrik{e}, that vnyte potencially is al nombre, and none in
act. And vndirstond{e} wele also that betwix euery .2. quadrat{es} ther
is a meene p{ro}porcionall{e}, That is opened{e} thus; lede the rote o
o quadrat into the rote o the o{er} quadrat, and an wolle e meene
shew.
[Sidenote: Examples o square roots.]
+-------------+-+-+-+-++-+-+-+-++-+-+-+-+-++-+---+------+-+
| Residuu{m} | | |0| || | | |4|| | |0| | || | | 0 | |
+-------------+-+-+-+-++-+-+-+-++-+-+-+-+-++-+---+------+-+
| Quadrand{e} |4|3|5|6||3|0|2|9||1|7|4|2|4||1| 9 | 3 |6|
+-------------+-+-+-+-++-+-+-+-++-+-+-+-+-++-+---+------+-+
| Duplum
|1|2| | ||1|0| | ||2| |6| | || |[8]|[{19}]| |
+-------------+-+-+-+-++-+-+-+-++-+-+-+-+-++-+---+------+-+
| Subduplu{m} | |6| |6|| |5| |5||1| |3| |2|| | 4 |
|4|
+-------------+-+-+-+-++-+-+-+-++-+-+-+-+-++-+---+------+-+
[Sidenote: A note on mean proportionals.]
Also betwix the next .2. cubikis, me may ynde a double meene, that is
to sey a more meene and a lesse. The more meene thus, as to bryng{e} the
rote o the lesse into a quadrat o the more. The lesse thus, I the
rote o the more be brought Into the quadrat o the lesse.

[Headnote: Chapter X. Extraction o Square Root.]

[Sidenote: To ind a square root. Begin with the last odd place.
Find the nearest square root o that number, subtract, double it,
and set the double one to the right. Find the second igure by
division. Multiply the double by the second igure, and add a ter
it the square o the second igure, and subtract.]
[{20}]To draw a rote o the nombre quadrat it is What-eu{er} nombre be
p{ro}posed{e} to ynde his rote and to se y it be quadrat. And y it be
not quadrat the rote o the most quadrat ynde out, vnder the nombre
p{ro}posed{e}. Ther or y thow wilt the rote o any quadrat nombre draw
out, write the nombre by his di erences, and compt the nombre o the
igures, and wete y it be od{e} or even. And y it be even, than most
thow begynne worche vnder the last save one. And y it be od{e} w{i}t{h}
the last; and orto sey it shortly, al-weyes ro the last od{e} me
shall{e} begynne. Ther or vnder the last in an od place sette, me most
ynd{e} a digit, the which{e} lad{e} in hym-sel {e} it puttith{e} away
that, at is ou{er} his hede, o{er} as neigh{e} as me may: suche a
digit ound{e} and w{i}t{h}draw ro his ou{er}er, me most double that
digit and sette the double vnder the next igure toward{e} the right
hond{e}, and his vnder double vnder hym. That done, than me most
y{n}d{e} a-no{er} digit vnder the next igure bi ore the doubled{e},
the which{e} [*Fol. 54b] brought in double setteth{e} a-way all{e} that
is ou{er} his hede as to reward{e} o the doubled{e}: Than brought into
hym-sel settith{e} all away in respect o hym-sel , Other do it as nye
as it may be do: other me may w{i}t{h}-draw the digit [{21}][last]
ound{e}, and lede hym in double or double hym, and a ter in
hym-sel {e}; Than Ioyne to-geder the p{ro}duccion{e} o them bothe, So
that the irst igure o the last p{ro}duct be added{e} be ore the irst
o the irst p{ro}duct{es}, the second{e} o the irst, {et}c. and so
orth{e}, subtrahe ro the totall{e} nombre in respect o e digit.
[Sidenote: Examples.]
+------------------+-+-+-+-+-++-+-+-+-+-++---+-+---+-+---+-+-+
| The residue
| | | | | || | | | | || | | |5| 4 |3|2|
+------------------+-+-+-+-+-++-+-+-+-+-++---+-+---+-+---+-+-+
| To be quadred{e} |4|1|2|0|9||1|5|1|3|9|| 9 |0| 0 |5| 4 |3|2|
+------------------+-+-+-+-+-++-+-+-+-+-++---+-+---+-+---+-+-+
| The double
| |4|0| | || |2| |4| || |6| |0| | |0|
+------------------+-+-+-+-+-++-+-+-+-+-++---+-+---+-+---+-+-+
| The vnder double |2| |0| |3||1| |2| |3||[3]| |[0]| |[0]| |0|
+------------------+-+-+-+-+-++-+-+-+-+-++---+-+---+-+---+-+-+
[Sidenote: Special cases. The residue.]
And i it hap {a}t no digit may be ound{e}, Than sette a ci re vndre
a ci re, and cesse not till{e} thow ynde a digit; and whan thow hast
ounde it to double it, ne{er} to sette the doubled{e} orward{e}
nether the vnder doubled{e}, Till thow ynde vndre the irst igure a
digit, the which{e} lad{e} in all{e} double, settyng away all{e} that is
ou{er} hym in respect o the doubled{e}: Than lede hym into hym-sel {e},
and put a-way all{e} in regard{e} o hym, other as nygh{e} as thow
maist. That done, other ought or nought wolle be the residue. I nought,
than it shewith{e} that a nombre componed{e} was the quadrat, and his
rote a digit last ound{e} w{i}t{h} vnder{e}-double other vndirdoubles,
so that it be sette be- ore: And y ought[{22}] remayn{e}, that
shew{i}t{h} that the nombre p{ro}posed{e} was not quadrat,[{23}]
[[wher-vpon{e} se the table in the next side o the next lee {e}.]]

but a digit [last ound with the subduple or subduples is]

[Sidenote: This table is constructed
giving the value o ab.^2]

or use in cube root sums,

+---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+---------+-----+---------+
| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 |
7
| 8 |
9 |
+---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+---------+-----+---------+
| 2 | 8 | 12 | 16 | 20 | 24 | 28
| 32 |
36 |
+---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+---------+-----+---------+
| 3 | 18 | 27 | 36 | 45 | 54 | 63
| 72 |
81 |
+---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+---------+-----+---------+
| 4 | 32 | 48 | 64 | 80 | 96 |112[{24}]| 128 | 144 |
+---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+---------+-----+---------+
| 5 | 50 | 75 | 100 | 125 | 150 | 175 | 200 | 225 |
+---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+---------+-----+---------+
| 6 | 72 | 108 | 144 | 180 | 216 | 252 | 288 | 324 |
+---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+---------+-----+---------+
| 7 | 98 | 147 | 196 | 245 | 294 | 343 | 393 | 441 |
+---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+---------+-----+---------+
| 8 | 128 | 192 | 256 | 320 | 384 | 448 | 512 | 576 |
+---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+---------+-----+---------+
| 9 | 168 | 243 | 324 | 405 | 486 | 567 | 648 |729[{25}]|
+---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+---------+-----+---------+
[Sidenote: How to prove the square root without or with a remainder.]
The rote o the most quadrat conteyned{e} vndre the nombre
p{ro}posed{e}. Ther or y thow wilt p{ro}ve y thow have wele do or no,
Multiplie the digit last ound{e} w{i}t{h} the vnder-double o{er}
vnder-doublis, and thow shalt ynde the same igures that thow haddest
be ore; And so that nought be the [*Fol. 55.] residue. And y thow have
any residue, than w{i}t{h} the addicio{u}n {er}o that is res{er}ued{e}
w{i}t{h}-out in thy table, thow shalt ynd{e} thi irst igures as thow
haddest them be ore, {et}c.
[Headnote: Chapter XI. Extraction o

Cube Root.]

[Sidenote: De inition o a cubic number and a cube root. Mark o

the places in threes. Find the irst digit; treble it and place it
under the next but one, and multiply by the digit. Then ind the
second digit. Multiply the irst triplate and the second digit, twice
by this digit. Subtract. Examples.]
Heere olowith{e} the extraccio{u}n o rotis in cubik{e} nombres;
wher- or me most se what is a nombre cubik{e}, and what is his roote,
And what is the extraccio{u}n o a rote. A nombre cubik{e} it is, as it
is be ore declared{e}, that cometh{e} o ledyng o any nombre twies in
hym-sel {e}, other ones in his quadrat. The rote o a nombre cubik{e} is
the nombre that is twies had{e} in hy{m}-sel {e}, or ones in his
quadrat. Wher-thurgh{e} it is open, that eu{er}y nombre quadrat or
cubik{e} have the same rote, as it is seid{e} be ore. And orto draw out
the rote o a cubik{e}, It is irst to ynd{e} e nombr{e} p{ro}posed{e}
y it be a cubik{e}; And y it be not, than thow most make extraccio{u}n
o his rote o the most cubik{e} vndre the nombre p{ro}posid{e} his rote
ound{e}. Ther or p{ro}posed{e} some nombre, whos cubical rote {o}u
woldest draw out; First thow most compt the igures by ourthes, that is
to sey in the place o thousand{es}; And vnder the last thousand{e}
place, thow most ynde a digit, the which{e} lad{e} in hym-sel cubikly
puttith{e} a-way that at is ou{er} his hede as in respect o hym, other

as nygh{e} as thow maist. That done, thow most trebill{e} the digit, and
that triplat is to be put vnder the .3. next igure toward{e} the right
hond{e}, And the vnder-trebill{e} vnder the trebill{e}; Than me most
ynd{e} a digit vndre the next igure bi ore the triplat, the which{e}
w{i}t{h} his vnder-trebill{e} had into a trebill{e}, a t{er}warde other
vnder[trebille][{26}] had in his p{ro}duccio{u}n, putteth{e} a-way
all{e} that is ou{er} it in regard{e} o [{27}] [the triplat. Then lade
in hymsel puttithe away that at is over his hede as in respect o hym,
other as nyghe as thou maist:] That done, thow most trebill{e} the digit
ayene, and the triplat is to be sette vnder the next .3. igure as
be ore, And the vnder-trebill{e} vnder the trebill{e}: and than most
thow sette orward{e} the irst triplat w{i}t{h} his vndre-trebill{e} by
.2. di erences. And than most thow ynde a digit vnder the next igure
be ore the triplat, the which{e} with{e} his vnder-t{r}iplat had in his
triplat a terward{e}, other vnder-treblis lad in p{ro}duct [*Fol. 55b]
It sitteth{e} a-way a that is ou{er} his hede in respect o the
triplat than had in hym-sel cubikly,[{28}] [[it setteth{e} a-way all{e}
his respect]] or as nygh{e} as ye may.
+----------------+--+-+-+-+-+-+---++--+-+-+-+-+--++----+-+--+-+--+
| Residuu{m}
| | | | | | | 5 || | | | | | 4|| 1|0|1 |9| |
+----------------+--+-+-+-+-+-+---++--+-+-+-+-+--++----+-+--+-+--+
| Cubicandu{s} | 8|3|6|5|4|3| 2 || 3|0|0|7|6| 7|| 1 1|6|6 |7| |
+----------------+--+-+-+-+-+-+---++--+-+-+-+-+--++----+-+--+-+--+
| Triplum
| | |6|0| | | || | | |1|8| ||
| |4 | | |
+----------------+--+-+-+-+-+-+---++--+-+-+---+--++----+-+--+-+--+
| Subt{r}iplu{m} | 2| | |0| | |[3]|| | |6| | | 7|| 2| | |2| |
+----------------+--+-+-+-+-+-+---++--+-+-+-+-+--++----+-+--+-+--+
[Sidenote: Continue this process till the irst igure is reached.
Examples. The residue. Special cases. Special case.]
Nother me shall{e} not cesse o the yndyng{e} o that digit, neither o
his triplacio{u}n, ne{er} o the triplat-is [{29}]anteriorac{i}o{u}n,
that is to sey, settyng orward{e} by .2. di erences, Ne thero the
vndre-triple to be put vndre the triple, Nether o the multiplicacio{u}n
{er}o , Neither o the subtraccio{u}n, till{e} it come to the irst
igure, vnder the which{e} is a digitall{e} nombre to be ound{e}, the
which{e} with{e} his vndre-treblis most be had{e} in tribles,
A ter-ward{e} w{i}t{h}out vnder-treblis to be had{e} into produccio{u}n,
settyng away all{e} that is ou{er} the hed{e} o the triplat nombre,
A ter had into hymsel {e} cubikly, and sette all{e}-way that is ou{er}
hym.
+------------------+---+---+---+---++---+---+---+---+---+
| To be cubiced{e} | 1 | 7 | 2 | 8 || 3 | 2 | 7 | 6 | 8 |
+------------------+---+---+---+---++---+---+---+---+---+
| The triple
| | | 3 | 2 || | | | 9 | |
+------------------+---+---+---+---++---+---+---+---+---+
| The vnder triple | | | 1 | 2 || |[3]| | 3 | 3 |
+------------------+---+---+---+---++---+---+---+---+---+
Also note wele that the p{ro}ducc{i}on comyng{e} o the ledyng o a
digite ound{e}[{30}] [[w{i}t{h} an vndre-triple / other o an
vndre-triple in a triple or triplat is And a ter-ward{e} w{i}t{h} out
vndre-triple other vndre-triplis in the p{ro}duct and ayene that
p{ro}duct that cometh{e} o the ledyng{e} o a digit ound{e} in
hym-sel {e} cubicall{e}]] me may adde to, and also w{i}t{h}-draw ro o
the totall{e} nombre sette above that digit so ound{e}.[{31}] [[as ther
had be a divisio{u}n made as it is opened{e} be ore]] That done ought or

nought most be the residue. I it be nought, It is open that the nombre

p{ro}posed{e} was a cubik{e} nombre, And his rote a digit ounde last
w{i}t{h} the vnder-triples: I the rote thero wex bad{e} in
hym-sel {e}, and a terward{e} p{ro}duct they shall{e} make the irst
ig{ur}es. And y ought be in residue, kepe that w{i}t{h}out in the
table; and it is open{e} that the nombre was not a cubik{e}. but a digit
last ounde w{i}t{h} the vndirtriplis is rote o the most cubik{e} vndre
the nombre p{ro}posed{e} conteyned{e}, the which{e} rote y it be had{e}
in hym-sel {e}, And a t{er}ward{e} in a p{ro}duct o that shall{e} growe
the most cubik{e} vndre the nombre p{ro}posed{e} conteyned{e}, And y
that be added{e} to a cubik{e} the residue res{er}ued{e} in the table,
woll{e} make the same igures that ye had{e} irst. [*Fol. 56.] And y
no digit a ter the anterioracio{u}n[{32}] may not be ound{e}, than put
ther{e} a ci re vndre a ci re vndir the third{e} igure, And put
orward{e} e ig{ur}es. Note also wele that y in the nombre
p{ro}posed{e} ther ben no place o thowsand{es}, me most begynne vnder
the irst igure in the extraccio{u}n o the rote. some vsen orto
distingue the nombre by threes, and ay begynne orto wirch{e} vndre the
irst o the last t{er}nary other unco{m}plete nombre, the which{e}
maner o op{er}acio{u}n accordeth{e} w{i}t{h} that be ore. And this at
this tyme su iseth{e} in extraccio{u}n o nombres quadrat or cubik{es}
{et}c.
[Sidenote: Examples.]
+-------------------+---+--+------+--+--+--+--++--+--+--+--+--+--+--+
| The residue
| | |
| | | | 0|| | | | | | 1| 1|
+-------------------+---+--+------+--+--+--+--++--+--+--+--+--+--+--+
| The cubicand{us} | 8 | 0| 0 | 0| 0| 0| 0|| 8| 2| 4| 2| 4| 1| 9|
+-------------------+---+--+------+--+--+--+--++--+--+--+--+--+--+--+
| The triple
| | |[{33}]| 0| 0| | || | | 6| | | | |
+-------------------+---+--+------+--+--+--+--++--+--+--+--+--+--+--+
| The vndert{r}iple |[2]| |
| 0| 0| | || 2| | | 6| 2| | |
+-------------------+---+--+------+--+--+--+--++--+--+--+--+--+--+--+
[Headnote: Table o Numbers, &c.]
[Sidenote: A table o numbers; probably

rom the Abacus.]

1 2
3
4
5
6
one. x. an. hundred{e}/ a thowsand{e}/ x. thowsand{e}/ An hundred{e}
7
thowsand{e}/ A thowsand{e} tymes a thowsand{e}/ x. thousand{e} tymes
a thousand{e}/ An hundred{e} thousand{e} tymes a thousand{e} A
thousand{e} thousand{e} tymes a thousand{e}/ this is the x place
{et}c.
[Ende.]
FOOTNOTES (The Art o Nombryng):
[1: MS. Materiall{e}.]
[2: MS. Formall{e}.]
[3: the in MS.]

[4: be in MS.]
[5: and in MS.]
[6: is in MS.]
[7: 6 in MS.]
[8: 0 in MS.]
[9: 2 in MS.]
[10: _sic._]
[11: And inserted in MS.]
[12: 4 the inserted in MS.]
[13: to in MS.]
[14: that repeated in MS.]
[15: 1 in MS.]
[16: Blank in MS.]
[17: nought in MS.]
[18: 3 written or 2 in MS.]
[19: 7 in MS.]
[20: runs on in MS.]
[21: so in MS.]
[22: nought in MS.]
[23: MS. adds here: wher-vpon{e} se the table in the next side o
the next lee {e}.]
[24: 110 in MS.]
[25: 0 in MS.]
[26: double in MS.]
[27: it hym-sel {e} in MS.]
[28: MS. adds here: it setteth{e} a-way all{e} his respect.]
[29: aucterioracio{u}n in MS.]
[30: MS. adds here: w{i}t{h} an vndre-triple / other o an
vndre-triple in a triple or triplat is And a ter-ward{e} w{i}t{h}
out vndre-triple other vndre-triplis in the p{ro}duct and ayene
that p{ro}duct that cometh{e} o the ledyng{e} o a digit ound{e}
in hym-sel {e} cubicall{e} /]
[31: MS. adds here: as ther had be a divisio{u}n made as it is
opened{e} be ore.]
[32: MS. anteriocacio{u}n.]
[33: 4 in MS.]

Accomptynge by counters.
[Transcribers Note:
The original text was printed as a single continuous paragraph, with
no break between speakers; all examples were shown inline. It has been
broken up or this e-text.]
[*116b]
The seconde dialoge o

accomptynge by counters.

_Mayster._
Nowe that you haue learned the commen kyndes o Arithmetyke with the
penne, you shall se the same art in cou{n}ters: whiche eate doth not
only serue or them that can not write and rede, but also or them that
can do bothe, but haue not at some tymes theyr penne or tables redye
with them. This sorte is in two ourmes co{m}menly. The one by lynes,

and the other without lynes: in that y^t hath lynes, the lynes do stande
or the order o places: and in y^t that hath no lynes, there must be
sette in theyr stede so many counters as shall nede, or eche lyne one,
and they shall supplye the stede o the lynes.
_S._ By examples I shuld better p{er}ceaue your meanynge.
_M._ For example o the [*117a.] ly[*]nes:
----1-0-0-0-0-0-----1-0-0-0-0----X--1-0-0-0---------1-0-0-----------1-0-------------1-----------[Sidenote: Numeration.]
Lo here you se .vi. lynes whiche stande or syxe places so that the
nethermost standeth or y^e yrst place, and the next aboue it, or the
second: and so vpward tyll you come to the hyghest, which is the syxte
lyne, and standeth or the syxte place. Now what is the valewe o euery
place or lyne, you may perceaue by the igures whiche I haue set on
them, which is accordynge as you learned be ore in the Numeration o
igures by the penne: or the yrste place is the place o vnities or
ones, and euery counter set in that lyne betokeneth but one: {and} the
seconde lyne is the place o 10, or euery counter there, standeth or
10. The thyrd lyne the place o hundredes: the ourth o thousandes:
{and} so orth.
_S._ Syr I do perceaue that the same order is here o lynes, as was in
the other igures [*117b] by places, so that you shall not nede longer
to stande about Numeration, excepte there be any other di erence.
_M._ Y you do vndersta{n}de it, then how wyll you set 1543?
_S._ Thus, as I suppose.
-------X--1-----5-----4-----3-_M._ You haue set y^e places truely, but your igures be not mete or
this vse: or the metest igure in this behal e, is the igure o a
cou{n}ter round, as you se here, where I haue expressed that same summe.
-------------X--o-------o
----------------o-o-o-o-----o-o-o---_S._ So that you haue not one igure or 2, nor 3, nor 4, and so orth,
but as many digettes as you haue, you set in the lowest lyne: and or

euery 10 you set one in the second line: and so o other. But I know not
by what reason you set that one counter or 500 betwene two lynes.
_M._ you shall remember this, that when so euer you nede to set downe 5,
50, or 500, or 5000, or so orth any other nomber, whose numerator
[*118a] is 5, you shall set one counter or it, in the next space aboue
the lyne that it hath his denomination o , as in this example o that
500, bycause the numerator is 5, it must be set in a voyd space: and
bycause the denominator is hundred, I knowe that his place is the voyde
space next aboue hundredes, that is to say, aboue the thyrd lyne. And
arther you shall marke, that in all workynge by this sorte, y you
shall sette downe any summe betwene 4 and 10, or the yrste parte o
that nomber you shall set downe 5, & then so many counters more, as
there reste no{m}bers aboue 5. And this is true bothe o digettes and
articles. And or example I wyll set downe this su{m}me 287965,
-X----------------o-o---o
------o-o-o-o
-X----o-o---o
----o-o-o-o-o
----o-------o
------------which su{m}me y you marke well, you nede none other exa{m}ples or to
lerne the numeration o [*118b] this orme. But this shal you marke,
that as you dyd in the other kynde o arithmetike, set a pricke in the
places o thousa{n}des, in this worke you shall sette a starre, as you
se here.
[Headnote: Addition on the Counting Board.]
[Sidenote: Addition.]
_S._ Then I perceave numeration, but I praye you, howe shall I do in
this arte to adde two summes or more together?
_M._ The easyest way in this arte is, to adde but 2 su{m}mes at ones
together: how be it you may adde more, as I wyll tell you anone.
Ther ore when you wyll adde two su{m}mes, you shall yrst set downe one
o them, it orseth not whiche, {and} then by it drawe a lyne crosse the
other lynes. And a terward set downe the other su{m}me, so that that
lyne may be betwene them, as y you wolde adde 2659 to 8342, you must
set your su{m}mes as you se
-------------|----------o
|
-X--o-o-o----|--o-o-----| o
----o-o-o----|--o-------| o
----o-o-o-o--|----------| o
----o-o------|--o-o-o-o--

here. And then y you lyst, you [*119a] may adde the one to the other in
the same place, or els you may adde them both together in a newe place:
which waye, bycause it is moste playnest, I wyll showe you yrst.
Ther ore wyl I begynne at the vnites, whiche in the yrst su{m}me is but
2, {and} in y^e second su{m}me 9, that maketh 11, those do I take vp,
and or them I set 11 in the new roume, thus,
-------------|-------|------o
|
|
-X--o-o-o----|--o-o--|------| o |
----o-o-o----|--o----|------|
o |
----o-o-o-o--|-------|-o----|
|
-------------|-------|-o----Then do I take vp all y^e articles vnder a hundred, which in the yrst
su{m}me are 40, and in the second summe 50, that maketh 90: or you may
saye better, that in the yrste summe there are 4 articles o 10, and in
the seconde summe 5, which make 9, but then take hede that you sette
them in theyr [*119b] ryght lynes as you se here.
-----------|----------|------------o
|
|
-X--o-o-o--|--o-o-----|------------| o
|
----o-o-o--|--o-------|------------|
| o
-----------|----------|--o-o-o-o-o-|
|
-----------|----------|--o---------Where I haue taken awaye 40 ro{m} the yrste su{m}me, and 50 rom y^e
second, and in theyr stede I haue set 90 in the thyrde, whiche I haue
set playnely y^t you myght well perceaue it: how be it seynge that 90
with the 10 that was in y^e thyrd roume all redy, doth make 100,
I myghte better or those 6 cou{n}ters set 1 in the thyrde lyne, thus:
----------X-----------o-----------------o----For it is all one summe as you may se, but it is beste, neuer to set 5
cou{n}ters in any line, or that may be done with 1 cou{n}ter in a
hygher place.
_S._ I iudge that good reaso{n},
serue.

or many are vnnede ull, where one wyll

_M._ Well, then [*120a] wyll I adde orth o hundredes: I ynde 3 in the
yrste summe, and 6 in the seconde, whiche make 900, them do I take vp
{and} set in the thyrd roume where is one hundred all redy, to whiche I

put 900, and it wyll be 1000, ther ore I set one cou{n}ter in the
lyne or them all, as you se here.

ourth

-----------|-------|-------o
|
|
-X--o-o-o--|--o-o--|--o----|
|
-----------|-------|-------|
|
-----------|-------|-------|
|
-----------|-------|--o----Then adde I y^e thousandes together, whiche in the yrst su{m}me are
8000, {and} in y^e second 2000, that maketh 10000: them do I take vp
ro{m} those two places, and or them I set one counter in the y te
lyne, and then appereth as you se, to be 11001, or so many doth amount
o the addition o 8342 to 2659.
----o-----X--o--------------------------o----[*120b] _S._ Syr, this I do perceave: but how shall I set one su{m}me to
an other, not chaungynge them to a thyrde place?
_M._ Marke well how I do it: I wyll adde together 65436, and 3245,
whiche yrste I set downe thus.
-------------|-------------|
o
-------------|--o----------| o
-X--o-o-o----|-------------|
----o-o------|--o-o-o-o----|
----o-o-o-o--|--o-o-o------o
|
o
-------------|--o----------Then do I begynne with the smalest, which in the yrst summe is 5, that
do I take vp, and wold put to the other 5 in the seconde summe, sauynge
that two counters can not be set in a voyd place o 5, but or them
bothe I must set 1 in the seconde lyne, which is the place o 10,
ther ore I take vp the 5 o the yrst su{m}me, {and} the 5 o the
seco{n}de, and or them I set 1 in the seco{n}d lyne, [*121a] as you se
here.
-------------|-------------| o
-------------|--o----------| o
-X--o-o-o----|--------------

|
----o-o------|--o-o-o-o----|
----o-o-o-o--|--o-o-o-o----|
-------------|--o----------Then do I lyke wayes take vp the 4 counters o the yrste su{m}me {and}
seconde lyne (which make 40) and adde them to the 4 counters o the same
lyne, in the second su{m}me, and it maketh 80, But as I sayde I maye not
conueniently set aboue 4 cou{n}ters in one lyne, ther ore to those 4
that I toke vp in the yrst su{m}me, I take one also o the seconde
su{m}me, and then haue I taken vp 50, or whiche 5 counters I sette
downe one in the space ouer y^e second lyne, as here doth appere.
-----------|-------------| o
-----------|--o----------| o
-X--o-o-o--|-------------|
----o-o----|--o-o-o-o----| o
-----------|--o-o-o------|
-----------|--o----------[*121b.] and then is there 80, as well w^t those 4 counters, as y I had
set downe y^e other 4 also. Now do I take the 200 in the yrste su{m}me,
and adde them to the 400 in the seconde summe, and it maketh 600,
ther ore I take vp the 2 counters in the yrste summe, and 3 o them in
the seconde summe, and or them 5 I set 1 in y^e space aboue, thus.
-----------|-----------| o
-----------|--o--------| o
-X--o-o-o--|-----------| o
-----------|--o--------| o
-----------|--o-o-o----|
-----------|--o--------Then I take y^e 3000 in y^e yrste su{m}me, vnto whiche there are none
in the second summe agreynge, ther ore I do onely remoue those 3
counters rom the yrste summe into the seconde, as here doth appere.
----|------------| o
----|---o--------| o
-X--|---o-o-o----| o
----|-o----------| o
----|---o-o-o----|
----|---o---------

[*122a.] And so you see the hole su{m}me, that amou{n}teth o the
addytio{n} o 65436 with 3245 to be 6868[1]. And y you haue marked
these two exa{m}ples well, you nede no arther enstructio{n} in Addition
o 2 only summes: but y you haue more then two summes to adde, you may
adde them thus. Fyrst adde two o them, and then adde the thyrde, and
y^e ourth, or more y there be so many: as y I wolde adde 2679 with
4286 and 1391. Fyrste I adde the two yrste summes thus.
-------------|-----------|-------------|
| o
-X--o-o------|--o-o-o-o--|--o----------o
|
| o
----o--------|--o-o------|--o-o-o-o----o
| o
| o
----o-o------|--o-o-o----|--o----------o
| o
| o
----o-o-o-o--|--o--------|-------------[*122b.] And then I adde the thyrde thereto thus. And so o more y
haue them.

you

-------------|-----------|-----------| o
|
o
-X--o--------|--o--------|--o-o-o----| o
|
----o-o-o----|--o-o-o-o--|--o-o-o----o
| o
| o
----o-o-o-o--|----o------|-----------| o
| o
----o--------|-----------|--o--------[Headnote: Subtraction on the Counting Board.]
[Sidenote: Subtraction.]
_S._ Nowe I thynke beste that you passe orth to Subtraction, except
there be any wayes to examyn this maner o Addition, then I thynke that
were good to be knowen nexte.
_M._ There is the same pro e here that is in the other Addition by the
penne, I meane Subtraction, or that onely is a sure waye: but
consyderynge that Subtraction must be yrste knowen, I wyl yrste teache
you the arte o Subtraction, and that by this example: I wolde subtracte
2892 out o 8746. These summes must I set downe as I dyd in Addition:
but here it is best [*116a (_sic_).] to set the lesser no{m}ber yrste,
thus.
-------------|-------------|
o
-X--o-o------|--o-o-o------o
| o
----o-o-o----|--o-o--------o
|
----o-o-o-o--|--o-o-o-o----| o
----o-o------|--o----------Then shall I begynne to subtracte the greatest nombres

yrste (contrary

to the vse o the penne) y^t is the thousandes in this exa{m}ple:

ther ore I ynd amongest the thousandes 2, or which I withdrawe so many
ro{m} the seconde summe (where are 8) and so remayneth there 6, as this
exa{m}ple showeth.
-------------+-------------| o
-+-----------+--o----------o
| o
----o-o-o----+--o-o--------o
|
----o-o-o-o--+--o-o-o-o----| o
----o-o------+--o----------Then do I lyke wayes with the hundredes, o whiche in the yrste summe
[*116b] I ynde 8, and is the seconde summe but 7, out o whiche I can
not take 8, ther ore thus muste I do: I muste loke how moche my summe
dy ereth rom 10, whiche I ynde here to be 2, then must I bate or my
su{m}me o 800, one thousande, and set downe the excesse o hundredes,
that is to saye 2, or so moche 100[0] is more then I shuld take vp.
Ther ore ro{m} the yrste su{m}me I take that 800, and rom the second
su{m}me where are 6000, I take vp one thousande, and leue 5000; but then
set I downe the 200 unto the 700 y^t are there all redye, and make them
900 thus.
-------------+-------------| o
-+-----------+-------------| o
-------------+--o-o-o-o----o
|
----o-o-o-o--+--o-o-o-o----| o
----o-o------+--o----------Then come I to the articles o te{n}nes where in the yrste su{m}me I
ynde 90, [*117a] and in the seconde su{m}me but only 40: Now
consyderyng that 90 can not be bated rom 40, I loke how moche y^t 90
doth dy er rom the next summe aboue it, that is 100 (or elles whiche
is all to one e ecte, I loke how moch 9 doth dy er ro{m} 10) {and} I
ynd it to be 1, then in the stede o that 90, I do take rom the second
summe 100: but consyderynge that it is 10 to moche, I set downe 1 in y^e
nexte lyne beneth or it, as you se here.
---------+-----------| o
-+-------+-----------| o
---------+--o-o-o----| o
---------+-----------| o
----o-o--+--o--------Sauynge that here I haue set one counter in y^e space in stede o 5 in
y^e nexte lyne. And thus haue I subtracted all saue two, which I must
bate rom the 6 in the second summe, and there wyll remayne 4, thus.
----+--------------

| o
-+--+-------------| o
----+--o-o-o------| o
----+-------------|
----+--o-o-o-o----So y^t y I subtracte 2892 ro{m} 8746, the remayner wyll be 5854,
[*117b] And that this is truely wrought, you maye proue by Addition: or
y you adde to this remayner the same su{m}me that you dyd subtracte,
then wyll the ormar su{m}me 8746 amount agayne.
_S._ That wyll I proue: and yrst I set the su{m}me that was subtracted,
which was 2892, {and} the{n} the remayner 5854, thus.
--------------+-------------|
o
-||--o-o------+-------------o
|
o
-----o-o-o----+--o-o-o------o
| o
-----o-o-o-o--+-------------|
-----o-o------+--o-o-o-o----Then do I adde yrst y^e 2 to 4, whiche maketh 6, so take I vp 5 o
those counters, and in theyr stede I sette 1 in the space, as here
appereth.
--------------+-----------|
o
-||--o-o------+-----------o
| o
-----o-o-o----+--o-o-o----o
| o
-----o-o-o-o--+-----------| o
--------------+--o--------[*118a] Then do I adde the 90 nexte aboue to the 50, and it maketh 140,
ther ore I take vp those 6 counters, and or them I sette 1 to the
hundredes in y^e thyrde lyne, {and} 4 in y^e second lyne, thus.
------------+-------------| o
-||--o-o----+-------------o
| o
-----o-o-o--+--o-o-o-o----|
------------+--o-o-o-o----| o
------------+----o--------Then do I come to the hundredes, o whiche I ynde 8 in the yrst summe,
and 9 in y^e second, that maketh 1700, ther ore I take vp those 9
counters, and in theyr stede I sette 1 in the .iiii. lyne, and 1 in the
space nexte beneth, and 2 in the thyrde lyne, as you se here.

----------+-------------| o
-||--o-o--+--o----------| o
----------+--o-o--------|
----------+--o-o-o-o----| o
----------+--o----------Then is there le te in the yrste summe but only 2000, whiche I shall
take vp rom thence, and set [*118b] in the same lyne in y^e second
su{m}me, to y^e one y^t is there all redy: {and} then wyll the hole
su{m}me appere (as you may wel se) to be 8746, which was y^e yrst
grosse summe, {and} ther ore I do perceaue, that I hadde well subtracted
be ore. And thus you may se how Subtraction maye be tryed by Addition.
----+-------------|
o
-X--+--o-o-o------|
o
----+--o-o--------|
----+--o-o-o-o----| o
----+----o--------_S._ I perceaue the same order here w^t cou{n}ters, y^t I lerned be ore
in igures.
_M._ Then let me se howe can you trye Addition by Subtraction.
_S._ Fyrste I wyl set orth this exa{m}ple o Additio{n} where I haue
added 2189 to 4988, and the hole su{m}me appereth to be 7177,
--------------+-----------+---------|
| o
-||--o-o------+--o-o-o-o--+--o-o----| o
|
-----o--------+--o-o-o-o--+--o------o
| o
| o
-----o-o-o----+--o-o-o----+--o-o----o
| o
| o
-----o-o-o-o--+--o-o-o----+--o-o----[*119a] Nowe to trye whether that su{m}me be well added or no, I wyll
subtract one o the yrst two su{m}mes rom the thyrd, and y I haue
well done y^e remayner wyll be lyke that other su{m}me. As or example:
I wyll subtracte the yrste summe rom the thyrde, whiche I set thus in
theyr order.
--------------+---------| o
-||--o-o------+--o-o----|
-----o--------+--o------o
| o
-----o-o-o----+--o-o----o
| o
-----o-o-o-o--+--o-o-----

Then do I subtract 2000 o the yrste summe ro{m} y^e second su{m}me,
and then remayneth there 5000 thus.
-------------+---------| o
-X-----------+----------|
----o--------+--o------o
| o
----o-o-o----+--o-o----o
| o
----o-o-o-o--+--o-o----Then in the thyrd lyne, I subtract y^e 100 o the yrste summe, ro{m}
the second su{m}me, where is onely 100 also, and then in y^e thyrde lyne
resteth nothyng. Then in the second lyne with his space ouer hym,
I ynde 80, which I shuld subtract [*119b] rom the other su{m}me, then
seyng there are but only 70 I must take it out o some hygher summe,
which is here only 5000, ther ore I take vp 5000, and seyng that it is
to moch by 4920, I sette downe so many in the seconde roume, whiche with
the 70 beynge there all redy do make 4990, & then the summes doth stande
thus.
--------------+-------------|
-||-----------+--o-o-o-o----| o
--------------+--o-o-o-o----| o
--------------+--o-o-o-o----o
| o
-----o-o-o-o--+--o-o--------Yet remayneth there in the yrst su{m}me 9, to be bated rom the second
summe, where in that place o vnities dothe appere only 7, then I muste
bate a hygher su{m}me, that is to saye 10, but seynge that 10 is more
then 9 (which I shulde abate) by 1, ther ore shall I take vp one counter
rom the seconde lyne, {and} set downe the same in the yrst [*120a] or
lowest lyne, as you se here.
-----+-------------|
-||--+--o-o-o-o----| o
-----+--o-o-o-o----| o
-----+--o-o-o------| o
-----+--o-o-o------And so haue I ended this worke, {and} the su{m}me appereth to be y^e
same, whiche was y^e seconde summe o my addition, and ther ore I
perceaue, I haue wel done.
_M._ To stande longer about this, it is but olye: excepte that this you
maye also vnderstande, that many do begynne to subtracte with counters,
not at the hyghest su{m}me, as I haue taught you, but at the
nethermoste, as they do vse to adde: and when the summe to be abatyd,
in any lyne appeareth greater then the other, then do they borowe one o

the next hygher roume, as or example: y

2378, they set y^e summes thus.

they shuld abate 1846 rom

--------------+-----------|
-||--o--------+--o-o------o
|
-----o-o-o----+--o-o-o----| o
-----o-o-o-o--+--o-o------o
| o
-----o--------+--o-o-o----[*120b] And yrste they take 6 whiche is in the lower lyne, and his
space rom 8 in the same roumes, in y^e second su{m}me, and yet there
remayneth 2 counters in the lowest lyne. Then in the second lyne must 4
be subtracte rom 7, and so remayneth there 3. Then 8 in the thyrde lyne
and his space, rom 3 o the second summe can not be, ther ore do they
bate it rom a hygher roume, that is, rom 1000, and bycause that 1000
is to moch by 200, ther ore must I sette downe 200 in the thyrde lyne,
a ter I haue taken vp 1000 rom the ourth lyne: then is there yet 1000
in the ourth lyne o the yrst summe, whiche y I withdrawe rom the
seconde summe, then doth all y^e igures stande in this order.
-----+-----------|
-||--+-----------| o
-----+-----------|
-----+--o-o-o----|
-----+--o-o------So that (as you se) it di ereth not greatly whether you begynne
subtractio{n} at the hygher lynes, or at [*121a] the lower. How be it,
as some menne lyke the one waye beste, so some lyke the other: ther ore
you now knowyng bothe, may vse whiche you lyst.
[Headnote: Multiplication by Counters.]
[Sidenote: Multiplication.]
But nowe touchynge Multiplicatio{n}: you shall set your no{m}bers in two
roumes, as you dyd in those two other kyndes, but so that the multiplier
be set in the yrste roume. Then shall you begyn with the hyghest
no{m}bers o y^e seconde roume, and multiply them yrst a ter this sort.
Take that ouermost lyne in your yrst workynge, as y it were the lowest
lyne, setting on it some mouable marke, as you lyste, and loke how many
counters be in hym, take them vp, and or them set downe the hole
multyplyer, so many tymes as you toke vp counters, reckenyng, I saye
that lyne or the vnites: {and} when you haue so done with the hygheest
no{m}ber then come to the nexte lyne beneth, {and} do euen so with it,
and so with y^e next, tyll you haue done all. And y there be any nomber
in a space, then or it [*121b] shall you take y^e multiplyer 5 tymes,
and then must you recken that lyne or the vnites whiche is nexte beneth
that space: or els a ter a shorter way, you shall take only hal e the
multyplyer, but then shall you take the lyne nexte aboue that space, or
the lyne o vnites: but in suche workynge, y chau{n}ce your multyplyer
be an odde nomber, so that you can not take the hal e o it iustly, then

muste you take the greater hal e, and set downe that, as i that it were
the iuste hal e, and arther you shall set one cou{n}ter in the space
beneth that line, which you recken or the lyne o vnities, or els only
remoue orward the same that is to be multyplyed.
_S._ Y you set

orth an example hereto I thynke I shal perceaue you.

_M._ Take this exa{m}ple: I wold multiply 1542 by 365, ther ore I set
y^e nombers thus.
------------+-------------|
-||---------+--o----------| o
-----o-o-o--+-------------o
|
-----o------+--o-o-o-o----o
|
------------+--o-o--------[*122a] Then yrste I begynne at the 1000 in y^e hyghest roume, as y it
were y^e yrst place, & I take it vp, settynge downe or it so o ten
(that is ones) the multyplyer, which is 365, thus, as you se here:
-----------+-----------+-----------|
|
-----------+-----------+--o-o-o----|
| o
-----------+-----------+--o--------|
| o
-X---------+-----------+------------ [<-]
| o
|
----o-o-o--+-----------+-----------o
|
|
----o------+--o-o-o-o--+-----------o
|
|
-----------+--o-o------+-----------where or the one counter taken vp rom the ourth lyne, I haue sette
downe other 6, whiche make y^e su{m}me o the multyplyer, reckenynge
that ourth lyne, as y it were the yrste: whiche thyng I haue marked
by the hand set at the begynnyng o y^e same,
_S._ I perceaue this well: or in dede, this summe that you haue set
downe is 365000, or so moche doth amount [*122b] o 1000, multiplyed by
365.
_M._ Well the{n} to go orth, in the nexte space I ynde one counter
which I remoue orward but take not vp, but do (as in such case I must)
set downe the greater hal e o my multiplier (seyng it is an odde
no{m}ber) which is 182, {and} here I do styll let that ourth place
stand, as y it were y^e yrst:
------------+-----------+--o-o-o--+--o--------|
| o
| o
------------+-----------+--o------+--o-o-o----|
| o
|
-||---------+-----------+---------+--o-o------- [<-]
|
|
| o
-----o-o-o--+-----------+---------+------------

o
|
|
|
-----o------+--o-o-o-o--+---------+-----------o
|
|
|
------------+--o-o------+---------+-----------as in this ourme you se, where I haue set this multiplycatio{n} with
y^e other: but or the ease o your vndersta{n}dynge, I haue set a
lytell lyne betwene them: now shulde they both in one su{m}me stand
thus.
------------+-----------+--o-o-o-o-o----|
|
------------+-----------+--o-o-o-o------|
| o
-||---------+-----------+--o-o----------- [<-]
|
| o
-----o-o-o--+-----------+---------------o
|
|
-----o------+--o-o-o-o--+---------------o
|
|
------------+--o-o------+---------------[*123a] Howe be it an other ourme to multyplye suche cou{n}ters i{n}
space is this: Fyrst to remoue the ynger to the lyne nexte benethe y^e
space, {and} then to take vp y^e cou{n}ter, {and} to set downe y^e
multiplyer .v. tymes, as here you se.
---------+---------+-o-o-o-+------+------+------+------+------+|
| o
|
|
|
|
|
|
---------+---------+-o-----+o-o-o-+o-o-o-+o-o-o-+o-o-o-+o-o-o-+|
| o
| o
| o
| o
| o
| o
|
---------+---------+-------+o-----+------+o-----+o-----+o-----+|
|
| o
| o
| o
| o
| o
|
[->]-X-o-o-o-+---------+-------+------+------+------+------+------+o
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
---o-----+-o-o-o-o-+-------+------+------+------+------+------+o
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
---------+-o-o-----+-------+------+------+------+------+------+Which su{m}mes y you do adde together into one su{m}me, you shal
p{er}ceaue that it wyll be y^e same y^t appeareth o y^e other worki{n}g
be ore, so that [*123b] bothe sortes are to one entent, but as the other
is much shorter, so this is playner to reason, or suche as haue had
small exercyse in this arte. Not withstandynge you maye adde them in
your mynde be ore you sette them downe, as in this exa{m}ple, you myghte
haue sayde 5 tymes 300 is 1500, {and} 5 tymes 60 is 300, also 5 tymes 5
is 25, whiche all put together do make 1825, which you maye at one tyme
set downe y you lyste. But nowe to go orth, I must remoue the hand to
the nexte counters, whiche are in the second lyne, and there must I take
vp those 4 counters, settynge downe or them my multiplyer 4 tymes,
whiche thynge other I maye do at 4 tymes seuerally, or elles I may
gather that hole summe in my mynde yrste, and then set it downe: as to
saye 4 tymes 300 is 1200: 4 tymes 60 are 240: and 4 tymes 5 make 20: y^t
is in all 1460, y^t shall I set downe also: as here you se.
o
-----------+-------+-----------+-------------|
|
|
-----------+-------+--o-o-o-o--+--o----------|
| o
|
-X---------+-------+--o-o------+--o-o-o-o-----

|
| o
| o
----o-o-o--+-------+-----------+--o----------o
|
|
|
[->] ----o------+-------+-----------+-------------o
|
|
|
-----------+--o-o--+-----------+-------------[*124a] whiche y I ioyne in one summe with the
appeare thus.
o
---------+-------+---------|
| o
---------+-------+--o------|
|
---------+-------+--o-o----|
|
--o-o-o--+-------+-o-------o
|
|
[->] --o------+-------+---------o
|
|
---------+--o-o--+----------

ormar nombers, it wyll

Then to ende this multiplycation, I remoue the ynger to the lowest

lyne, where are onely 2, them do I take vp, and in theyr stede do I set
downe twyse 365, that is 730, or which I set [*124b] one in the space
aboue the thyrd lyne or 500, and 2 more in the thyrd lyne with that one
that is there all redye, and the reste in theyr order, {and} so haue I
ended the hole summe thus.
o
---------+-----+-----------|
| o
---------+-----+--o--------|
|
---------+-----+--o-o------|
| o
--o-o-o--+-----+--o-o-o----o
|
|
--o------+-----+--o-o-o----o
|
|
---------+-----+-----------Wherby you se, that 1542 (which is the nomber o yeares syth Ch[r]ystes
incarnation) beyng multyplyed by 365 (which is the nomber o dayes in
one yeare) dothe amounte vnto 562830, which declareth y^e no{m}ber o
daies sith Chrystes incarnatio{n} vnto the ende o 1542[{1}] yeares.
(besyde 385 dayes and 12 houres or lepe yeares).
_S._ Now wyll I proue by an other exa{m}ple, as this: 40 labourers
(a ter 6 d. y^e day or eche man) haue wrought 28 dayes, I wold [*125a]
know what theyr wages doth amou{n}t vnto: In this case muste I worke
doublely: yrst I must multyplye the nomber o the labourers by y^e
wages o a man or one day, so wyll y^e charge o one daye amount: then
secondarely shall I multyply that charge o one daye, by the hole nomber
o dayes, {and} so wyll the hole summe appeare: yrst there ore I shall
set the su{m}mes thus.
------+-------------|
------+-------------|

------+-------------|
------+--o-o-o-o----o |
--o---+-------------Where in the yrste space is the multyplyer (y^t is one dayes wages or
one man) {and} in the second space is set the nomber o the worke men to
be multyplyed: the{n} saye I, 6 tymes 4 (reckenynge that second lyne as
the lyne o vnites) maketh 24, or whiche summe I shulde set 2 counters
in the thyrde lyne, and 4 in the seconde, ther ore do I set 2 in the
thyrde lyne, and let the 4 stand styll in the seconde lyne, thus.[*125b]
-----+-------------|
-----+-------------|
-----+--o-o--------|
-----+--o-o-o-o----|
-----+-------------So apwereth the hole dayes wages to be 240d. that is 20 s. Then do I
multiply agayn the same summe by the no{m}ber o dayes and yrste I
sette the nombers, thus.
---------+-------------|
---------+-------------|
---------+--o-o--------|
--o-o----+--o-o-o-o----o
|
--o-o-o--+------------The{n} bycause there are counters in dyuers lynes, I shall begynne with
the hyghest, and take them vp, settynge or them the multyplyer so many
tymes, as I toke vp counters, y^t is twyse, then wyll y^e su{m}me stande
thus.
-----+-------------| o
-----+-------------| o
-----+--o----------|
-----+--o-o-o-o----|
-----+-------------Then come I to y^e seconde lyne, and take vp those 4 cou{n}ters,
settynge or them the multiplyer oure tymes, so wyll the hole summe
appeare thus.[*126a]
-----+---------| o
-----+--o------| o

-----+--o-o----|
-----+--o-o----|
-----+---------So is the hole wages o 40 workeme{n}, or 28 dayes (a ter 6d. eche
daye or a man) 6720d. that is 560 s. or 28 li.
[Headnote: Division on the Counting Board.]
[Sidenote: Diuision.]
_M._ Now i you wold proue Multiplycatio{n}, the surest way is by
Dyuision: ther ore wyll I ouer passe it tyll I haue taught you y^e arte
o Diuision, whiche you shall worke thus. Fyrste sette downe the Diuisor
or eare o orgettynge, and then set the nomber that shalbe deuided,
at y^e ryghte syde, so arre rom the diuisor, that the quotient may be
set betwene them: as or exa{m}ple: Y 225 shepe cost 45 li. what dyd
euery shepe cost? To knowe this, I shulde diuide the hole summe, that is
45 li. by 225, but that can not be, ther ore must I yrste reduce that
45 li. into a lesser denomination, as into shyllynges: then I multiply
45 by 20, and it is 900, that summe shall I diuide by the no{m}ber o
[*126b] shepe, whiche is 225, these two nombers ther ore I sette thus.
-------+-----+-------------|
|
-------+-----+-------------|
| o
--o-o--+-----+--o-o-o-o----|
|
--o-o--+-----+-------------o |
|
-------+-----+-------------Then begynne I at the hyghest lyne o the diuident, and seke how o ten I
may haue the diuisor therin, and that maye I do 4 tymes, then say I,
4 tymes 2 are 8, whyche y I take rom 9, there resteth but 1, thus
-------+-----------+-------|
|
-------+-----------+-------|
|
--o-o--+-----------+--o----|
|
--o-o--+-----------+-------o |
|
-------+--o-o-o-o--+-------And bycause I
(as you se) 4
quotient: but
the remayner:
2 oure tymes

ounde the diuisor 4 tymes in the diuidente, I haue set

in the myddle roume, which [*127a] is the place o the
now must I take the reste o the diuisor as o ten out o
ther ore come I to the seconde lyne o the diuisor, sayeng
make 8, take 8 rom 10, {and} there resteth 2, thus.

----------+-----------+---------|
|
-||-------+-----------+---------|
|
-----o-o--+-----------+----------

|
|
-----o-o--+-----------+--o-o----o |
|
----------+--o-o-o-o--+---------Then come I to the lowest nomber, which is 5, and multyply it 4 tymes,
so is it 20, that take I rom 20, and there remayneth nothynge, so that
I se my quotient to be 4, whiche are in valewe shyllynges, or so was
the diuident: and therby I knowe, that y 225 shepe dyd coste 45 li.
euery shepe coste 4 s.
_S._ This can I do, as you shall perceaue by this exa{m}ple: Y 160
sowldyars do spende euery moneth 68 li. what spendeth eche man? Fyrst
[*127b] bycause I can not diuide the 68 by 160, ther ore I wyll turne
the pou{n}des into pennes by multiplicacio{n}, so shall there be
16320 d. Nowe muste I diuide this su{m}me by the nomber o sowldyars,
ther ore I set the{m} i{n} order, thus.
---------+-----+--o--------|
| o
-||------+-----+--o--------|
|
-----o---+-----+--o-o-o----o |
|
-----o---+-----+--o-o------|
|
---------+-----+-----------Then begyn I at the hyghest place o the diuidente, sekynge my diuisor
there, whiche I ynde ones, Ther ore set I 1 in the nether lyne.
_M._ Not in the nether line o the hole summe, but in the nether lyne o
that worke, whiche is the thyrde lyne.
_S._ So standeth it with reason.
_M._ Then thus do they stande.[*128a]
---------+-----+-----------|
|
-||------+-----+-----------|
|
-----o---+--o--+--o-o-o----o |
|
-----o---+-----+--o-o------|
|
---------+-----+-----------Then seke I agayne in the reste, how o ten I may ynde my diuisor, and I
se that in the 300 I myghte ynde 100 thre tymes, but then the 60 wyll
not be so o ten ounde in 20, ther ore I take 2 or my quotient: then
take I 100 twyse rom 300, and there resteth 100, out o whiche with the
20 (that maketh 120) I may take 60 also twyse, and then standeth the
nombers thus,
---------+-------+----|
|
-||------+-------+----|
|
-----o---+--o----+-----

o |
|
-----o---+-------+----|
|
---------+--o-o--+----[*128b] where I haue sette the quotient 2 in the lowest lyne: So is
euery sowldyars portion 102 d. that is 8 s. 6 d.
_M._ But yet bycause you shall perceaue iustly the reason o Diuision,
it shall be good that you do set your diuisor styll agaynst those
nombres ro{m} whiche you do take it: as by this example I wyll declare.
Y y^e purchace o 200 acres o ground dyd coste 290 li. what dyd one
acre coste? Fyrst wyl I turne the poundes into pennes, so wyll there be
69600 d Then in settynge downe these nombers I shall do thus.
---------+-----+-------------|
| o
----o-o--+-----+--o----------|
| o
-X-------+-----+--o-o-o-o----|
|
o
---------+-----+--o----------|
|
---------+-----+-------------|
|
---------+-----+-------------Fyrst set the diuident on the ryghte hande as it oughte, and then
[*129a] the diuisor on the le te hande agaynst those nombers, ro{m}
which I entende to take hym yrst as here you se, wher I haue set the
diuisor two lynes hygher the{n} is theyr owne place.
_S._ This is lyke the order o

diuision by the penne.

_M._ Truth you say, and nowe must I set y^e quotient o this worke in
the thyrde lyne, or that is the lyne o vnities in respecte to the
diuisor in this worke. Then I seke howe o ten the diuisor maye be ounde
in the diuident, {and} that I ynde 3 tymes, then set I 3 in the thyrde
lyne or the quotient, and take awaye that 60000 ro{m} the diuident,
and arther I do set the diuisor one line lower, as yow se here.
----------+---------+-------------|
| o
-||--o-o--+---------+--o-o-o-o----|
| o
----------+--o-o-o--+----o--------|
|
----------+---------+-------------|
|
----------+---------+-------------[*129b] And then seke I how o ten the diuisor wyll be taken rom the
nomber agaynste it, whiche wyll be 4 tymes and 1 remaynynge.
_S._ But what y it chaunce that when the diuisor is so remoued, it can
not be ones taken out o the diuident agaynste it?
_M._ Then must the diuisor be set in an other line lower.
_S._ So was it in diuision by the penne, and ther ore was there a cypher

set in the quotient: but howe shall that be noted here?

_M._ Here nedeth no token, or the lynes do represente the places: onely
loke that you set your quotient in that place which standeth or vnities
in respecte o the diuisor: but now to returne to the example, I ynde
the diuisor 4 tymes in the diuidente, and 1 remaynynge, or 4 tymes 2
make 8, which I take rom 9, and there resteth 1, as this igure
sheweth:
----------+-----------+--------|
|
-||--o-o--+-----------+--o-----|
| o
----------+--o-o-o----+--o-----|
|
----------+--o-o-o-o--+--------|
|
----------+-----------+--------and in the myddle space or the quotient I set 4 in the seconde lyne,
whiche is in this worke the place o vnities.[*130a] Then remoue I y^e
diuisor to the next lower line, and seke how o ten I may haue it in the
dyuident, which I may do here 8 tymes iust, and nothynge remayne, as in
this ourme,
----------+-----------+----|
|
-||--o-o--+-----------+----|
|
----------+--o-o-o----+----|
|
----------+--o-o-o-o--+----| o
|
----------+--o-o-o----+----where you may se that the hole quotient is 348 d, that is 29 s. wherby
I knowe that so moche coste the purchace o one aker.
_S._ Now resteth the pro es o Multiplycatio{n}, and also o

Diuisio{n}.

_M._ Ther best pro es are eche [*130b] one by the other, or
Multyplication is proued by Diuision, and Diuision by Multiplycation,
as in the worke by the penne you learned.
_S._ Y that be all, you shall not nede to repete agayne that, y^t was
su icye{n}tly taughte all redye: and excepte you wyll teache me any
other eate, here maye you make an ende o this arte I suppose.
_M._ So wyll I do as touchynge hole nomber, and as or broken nomber,
I wyll not trouble your wytte with it, tyll you haue practised this so
well, y^t you be ull per ecte, so that you nede not to doubte in any
poynte that I haue taught you, and thenne maye I boldly enstructe you in
y^e arte o ractions or broken no{m}ber, wherin I wyll also showe you
the reasons o all that you haue nowe learned. But yet be ore I make an
ende, I wyll showe you the order o co{m}men castyng, wher in are bothe
pennes, shyllynges, and poundes, procedynge by no grounded reason, but
onely by a receaued [*131a] ourme, and that dyuersly o dyuers men: or
marchau{n}tes vse one ourme, and auditors an other:
[Headnote: Merchants Casting Counters.]

[Sidenote: Merchants casting.]

But yrste or marchauntes
o
o
o

o o
o
o o
o
o o
o
o o

ourme marke this example here,

o o
o
o o
o o o

in which I haue expressed this summe 198 li.[{2}] 19 s. 11 d. So that

you maye se that the lowest lyne serueth or pe{n}nes, the next aboue
or shyllynges, the thyrde or poundes, and the ourth or scores o
pou{n}des. And arther you maye se, that the space betwene pennes and
shyllynges may receaue but one counter (as all other spaces lyke wayes
do) and that one standeth in that place or 6 d. Lyke wayes betwene the
shyllynges {and} the pou{n}des, one cou{n}ter standeth or 10 s. And
betwene the poundes and 20 li. one counter standeth or 10 pou{n}des.
But besyde those you maye see at the le t syde o shyllynges, that one
counter standeth alone, {and} betokeneth 5 s. [*131b] So agaynste the
poundes, that one cou{n}ter standeth or 5 li. And agaynst the 20
poundes, the one counter standeth or 5 score pou{n}des, that is
100 li. so that euery syde counter is 5 tymes so moch as one o them
agaynst whiche he standeth.
[Sidenote: Auditors casting.]
Now or the accompt o auditors take this example.
o
o o o
o

o o
o o o

o o
o o o
o

o
o o o
o o

where I haue expressed y^e same su{m}me 198 li. 19 s. 11 d. But here
you se the pe{n}nes stande toward y^e ryght hande, and the other
encreasynge orderly towarde the le te hande. Agayne you maye se, that
auditours wyll make 2 lynes (yea and more) or pennes, shyllynges, {and}
all other valewes, y theyr summes extende therto. Also you se, that
they set one counter at the ryght ende o eche rowe, whiche so set there
standeth or 5 o that roume: and on [*132a] the le te corner o the
rowe it sta{n}deth or 10, o y^e same row. But now y you wold adde
other subtracte a ter any o both those sortes, y you marke y^e order
o y^t other eate which I taught you, you may easely do the same here
without moch teachynge: or in Additio{n} you must yrst set downe one
su{m}me and to the same set the other orderly, and lyke maner y you
haue many: but in Subtraction you must sette downe yrst the greatest
summe, and rom it must you abate that other euery denominatio{n} rom
his dewe place.
_S._ I do not doubte but with a lytell practise I shall attayne these
bothe: but how shall I multiply and diuide a ter these ourmes?
_M._ You can not duely do none o both by these sortes, ther ore in
suche case, you must resort to your other artes.
_S._ Syr, yet I se not by these sortes how to expresse hu{n}dreddes,
y they excede one hundred, nother yet thousandes.

_M._ They that vse such accomptes that it excede 200 [*132b] in one
summe, they sette no 5 at the le te hande o the scores o poundes, but
they set all the hundredes in an other arther rowe {and} 500 at the
le te hand thero , and the thousandes they set in a arther rowe yet,
{and} at the le te syde thero they sette the 5000, and in the space
ouer they sette the 10000, and in a hygher rowe 20000, whiche all I haue
expressed in this exa{m}ple,

o
o
o

o o
o
o o
o o
o o
o o
o
o o
o
o o

o o
o
o
o o

o
o o
o

which is 97869 li. 12 s. 9 d ob. q. or I had not told you be ore

where, nother how you shuld set downe arthynges, which (as you se here)
must be set in a voyde space sydelynge beneth the pennes: or q one
counter: or ob. 2 counters: or ob. q. 3 counters: {and} more there can
not be, or 4 arthynges [*133a] do make 1 d. which must be set in his
dewe place.
[Headnote: Auditors Casting Counters.]
And y you desyre y^e same summe a ter audytors maner, lo here it is.
o o o
o

o o
o o

o
o o o

o o o

o
o o o
o

o
o o

o
o o o
o o
o

But in this thyng, you shall take this or su ycyent, and the reste you
shall obserue as you maye se by the working o eche sorte: or the
dyuers wittes o men haue inuented dyuers and sundry wayes almost
vnnumerable. But one eate I shall teache you, whiche not only or the
straungenes and secretnes is moche pleasaunt, but also or the good
co{m}moditie o it ryghte worthy to be well marked. This eate hath ben
vsed aboue 2000 yeares at the leaste, and yet was it neuer come{n}ly
knowen, especyally in Englysshe it was neuer taughte yet. This is the
arte o nombrynge on the hand, with diuers gestures o the yngers,
expressynge any summe conceaued in the [*133b] mynde. And yrst to
begynne, y you wyll expresse any summe vnder 100, you shall expresse it
with your le te hande: and rom 100 vnto 10000, you shall expresse it
with your ryght hande, as here orderly by this table olowynge you may
perceaue.
+ Here oloweth the table
o the arte o the
hande+

The arte o nombrynge by the hande.

[Transcribers Note:
Footnote 3 reads:
Bracket ([) denotes new paragraph in original.
For this e-text, the brackets have been omitted in avor o restoring
the paragraph breaks. Changes o speaker (M, S) are also marked by
paragraphs, as in the previous selection.
The illustration includes the printed page number 134; there is
there ore no sidenote *134a. The sidenote or 4 is missing.]
[Illustration: (Numbers as described in text)]
[Sidenote: 1]
[*134b] In which as you may se 1 is expressed by y^e lyttle ynger o
y^e le te hande closely and harde croked.
[Sidenote: 2]
[{3}]2 is declared by lyke bowynge o the weddynge ynger (whiche is the
nexte to the lyttell ynger) together with the lytell ynger.
[Sidenote: 3]
3 is signi ied by the myddle ynger bowed in lyke maner, with those
other two.
4 is declared by the bowyng o the myddle ynger and the rynge ynger,
or weddynge ynger, with the other all stretched orth.
[Sidenote: 5, 6]
5 is represented by the myddle

ynger onely bowed.

And 6 by the weddynge ynger only crooked: and this you may marke in
these a certayne order. But now 7, 8, and 9, are expressed w{i}t{h} the
bowynge o the same yngers as are 1, 2, and 3, but a ter an other
ourme.
[Sidenote: 7]
For 7 is declared by the bowynge o the lytell ynger, as is 1, saue
that or 1 the ynger is clasped in, harde {and} [*135a] rounde, but or
to expresse 7, you shall bowe the myddle ioynte o the lytell ynger
only, and holde the other ioyntes streyght.
_S._ Y you wyll geue me leue to expresse it a ter my rude maner, thus I
vnderstand your meanyng: that 1 is expressed by crookynge in the lyttell
ynger lyke the head o a bysshoppes bagle: and 7 is declared by the
same ynger bowed lyke a gybbet.
_M._ So I perceaue, you vnderstande it.
[Sidenote: 8]
Then to expresse 8, you shall bowe a ter the same maner both the lyttell

ynger and the rynge ynger.

[Sidenote: 9, 10]
And y you bowe lyke wayes with them the myddle ynger, then doth it
betoken 9.
Now to expresse 10, you shall bowe your ore ynger rounde, and set the
ende o it on the hyghest ioynte o the thombe.
[Sidenote: 20]
And or to expresse 20, you must set your yngers streyght, and the ende
o your thombe to the partitio{n} o the [*135b] ore moste and myddle
ynger.
[Sidenote: 30]
30 is represented by the ioynynge together o y^e headdes o the
oremost ynger and the thombe.
[Sidenote: 40]
40 is declared by settynge o the thombe crossewayes on the
ynger.

oremost

[Sidenote: 50]
50 is signi ied by ryght stretchyng orth o the yngers ioyntly, and
applyenge o the thombes ende to the partition o the myddle ynger
{and} the rynge ynger, or weddynge ynger.
[Sidenote: 60]
60 is ormed by bendynge o
ore ynger.

the thombe croked and crossynge it with the

[Sidenote: 70]
70 is expressed by the bowynge o the oremost ynger, and settynge the
ende o the thombe between the 2 oremost or hyghest ioyntes o it.
[Sidenote: 80]
80 is expressed by settynge o the oremost ynger crossewayes on the
thombe, so that 80 dy ereth thus ro{m} 40, that or 80 the ore ynger
is set crosse on the thombe, and or 40 the thombe is set crosse ouer
y^e ore inger.
[Sidenote: 90]
[*136a] 90 is signi ied, by bendynge the ore ynger, and settyng the
ende o it in the innermost ioynte o y^e thombe, that is euen at the
oote o it. And thus are all the no{m}bers ended vnder 100.
[Sidenote: 11, 12, 13, 21, 22, 23]
_S._ In dede these be all the nombers ro{m} 1 to 10, {and} then all the
tenthes within 100, but this teacyed me not how to expresse 11, 12, 13,
{et}c. 21, 22, 23, {et}c. and such lyke.

_M._ You can lytell vnderstande, y you can not do that without
teachynge: what is 11? is it not 10 and 1? then expresse 10 as you were
taught, and 1 also, and that is 11: and or 12 expresse 10 and 2: or 23
set 20 and 3: and so or 68 you muste make 60 and there to 8: and so o
all other sortes.
[Sidenote: 100]
But now y you wolde represente 100 other any nomber aboue it, you muste
do that with the ryghte hande, a ter this maner. [You must expresse 100
in the ryght hand, with the lytell ynger so bowed as you dyd expresse 1
in the le t hand.
[Sidenote: 200]
[*136b] And as you expressed 2 in the le te hande, the same
the ryght hande doth declare 200.

asshyon in

[Sidenote: 300]
The ourme o 3 in the ryght hand standeth or 300.
[Sidenote: 400]
The ourme o 4, or 400.
[Sidenote: 500]
Lykewayes the ourme o

5, or 500.

[Sidenote: 600]
The ourme o 6, or 600. And to be shorte: loke how you did expresse
single vnities and tenthes in the le te hande, so must you expresse
vnities {and} tenthes o hundredes, in the ryghte hande.
[Sidenote: 900]
_S._ I vnderstande you thus: that y I wold represent 900, I must so
ourme the yngers o my ryghte hande, as I shuld do in my le t hand to
expresse 9,
[Sidenote: 1000]
And as in my le te hand I expressed 10, so in my ryght hande must I
expresse 1000.
And so the ourme o euery tenthe in the le te hande serueth to expresse
lyke no{m}ber o thousa{n}des,
[Sidenote: 4000]
so y^e ourme o 40 standeth
[Sidenote: 8000]
The ourme o 80 or 8000.
[Sidenote: 9000]

or 4000.

[*137a]
And the ourme o 90 (whiche is
the greatest) or 9000, and aboue that
I can not expresse any nomber. _M._
No not with one ynger: how be it,
w{i}t{h} dyuers yngers you maye expresse
9999, and all at one tyme, and that lac
keth but 1 o 10000. So that vnder
10000 you may by your yngers expresse any summe. And this shal su yce or Numeration on the yngers.
And as or Addition, Subtraction,
Multiplicatio{n}, and Diuision (which
yet were neuer taught by any man as
arre as I do knowe) I wyll enstruct
you a ter the treatyse o ractions.
And now or this tyme are well,
and loke that you cease not to
practyse that you haue lear
ned. _S._ Syr, with moste
harty mynde I thanke
you, bothe or your
good learnyng, {and}
also your good
cou{ns}el, which
(god wyllyng) I truste to olow.
Finis.
FOOTNOTES (Accomptynge by counters
_and_ The arte o nombrynge by the hande):
[1: 1342 in original.]
[2: 168 in original.]
[3: Bracket ([) denotes new paragraph in original.]

APPENDIX I.
+A Treatise on the Numeration o

Algorism.+

[_From a MS. o the 14th Century._]

To alle suche even nombrys the most have ci rys as to ten. twenty.
thirtty. an hundred. an thousand and suche other. but ye schal
vnderstonde that a ci re tokeneth nothinge but he maketh other the more
signi icaty that comith a ter hym. Also ye schal vnderstonde that in
nombrys composyt and in alle other nombrys that ben o diverse igurys
ye schal begynne in the ritht syde and to rekene backwarde and so he
schal be wryte as thus--1000. the si re in the ritht side was irst
wryte and yit he tokeneth nothinge to the secunde no the thridde but
thei maken that igure o 1 the more signy icaty that comith a ter hem
by as moche as he born oute o his irst place where he schuld y he

stode ther tokene but one. And there he stondith nowe in the erye place
he tokeneth a thousand as by this rewle. In the irst place he tokeneth
but hymsel . In the secunde place he tokeneth ten times hymsel . In the
thridde place he tokeneth an hundred tymes himsel . In the erye he
tokeneth a thousand tymes himsel . In the y tye place he tokeneth ten
thousand tymes himsel . In the sexte place he tokeneth an hundred
thousand tymes hymsel . In the seveth place he tokeneth ten hundred
thousand tymes hymsel , &c. And ye schal vnderstond that this worde
nombre is partyd into thre partyes. Somme is callyd nombre o digitys
or alle ben digitys that ben withine ten as ix, viii, vii, vi, v, iv,
iii, ii, i. Articules ben alle thei that mow be devyded into nombrys o
ten as xx, xxx, xl, and suche other. Composittys be alle nombrys that
ben componyd o a digyt and o an articule as ourtene y tene thrittene
and suche other. Fourtene is componyd o our that is a digyt and o ten
that is an articule. Fy tene is componyd o yve that is a digyt and o
ten that is an articule and so o others . . . . . . But as to this
rewle. In the irste place he tokeneth but himsel that is to say he
tokeneth but that and no more. I that he stonde in the secunde place he
tokeneth ten tymes himsel as this igure 2 here 21. this is oon and
twenty. This igure 2 stondith in the secunde place and ther or he
tokeneth ten tymes himsel and ten tymes 2 is twenty and so orye o
every igure and he stonde a ter another toward the lest syde he schal
tokene ten tymes as moche more as he schuld token and he stode in that
place ther that the igure a ore him stondeth: lo an example as thus
9634. This igure o oure that hath this schape 4 tokeneth but himsel
or he stondeth in the irst place. The igure o thre that hath this
schape 3 tokeneth ten tyme himsel or he stondeth in the secunde place
and that is thritti. The igure o sexe that hath this schape 6 tokeneth
ten tyme more than he schuld and he stode in the place yer the igure o
thre stondeth or ther he schuld tokene but sexty. And now he tokeneth
ten tymes that is sexe hundrid. The igure o nyne that hath this schape
9 tokeneth ten tymes more than he schulde and he stode in the place ther
the igure o 6 stondeth inne or thanne he schuld tokene but nyne
hundryd. And in the place that he stondeth inne nowe he tokeneth nine
thousand. Alle the hole nombre o these oure igurys. Nine thousand
sexe hundrid and oure and thritti.

APPENDIX II.
Carmen de Algorismo.
[_From a B.M. MS., 8 C. iv., with additions rom 12 E. 1 & Eg. 2622._]
Hec algorismus ars presens dicitur[{1}]; in qua
Talibus Indorum[{2}] ruimur his quinque iguris.
0. 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1.
Prima signi icat unum: duo vero secunda:
Tercia signi icat tria: sic procede sinistre
Donec ad extremam venies, qua ci ra vocatur;
[{3}][Que nil signi icat; dat signi icare sequenti.]
Quelibet illarum si primo limite ponas,
Simpliciter se signi icat: si vero secundo,
Se decies: sursum procedas multiplicando.[{4}]
[Namque igura sequens quevis signat decies plus,
Ipsa locata loco quam signi icet pereunte:
Nam precedentes plus ultima signi icabit.]

8
12

[{5}]Post predicta scias quod tres breuiter numerorum

Distincte species sunt; nam quidam digiti sunt;
Articuli quidam; quidam quoque compositi sunt.
[Sunt digiti numeri qui citra denarium sunt;
Articuli decupli degitorum; compositi sunt
Illi qui constant ex articulis digitisque.]
Ergo, proposito numero tibi scribere, primo
Respicias quis sit numerus; quia si digitus sit,
[{5}][Una igura satis sibi; sed si compositus sit,]
Primo scribe loco digitum post articulum ac
Articulus si sit, ci ram post articulum sit,
[Articulum vero reliquenti in scribe igure.]
Quolibet in numero, si par sit prima igura,
Par erit et totum, quicquid sibi continetur;
Impar si uerit, totum sibi iet et impar.
Septem[{6}] sunt partes, non plures, istius artis;
Addere, subtrahere, duplare, dimidiare;
Sexta est diuidere, set quinta est multiplicare;
Radicem extrahere pars septima dicitur esse.
Subtrahis aut addis a dextris vel mediabis;
A leua dupla, diuide, multiplicaque;
Extrahe radicem semper sub parte sinistra.

16

20

24

28

32

[Sidenote: Addition.]
Addere si numero numerum vis, ordine tali
Incipe; scribe duas primo series numerorum
Prima sub prima recte ponendo iguram,
Et sic de reliquis acias, si sint tibi plures.
Inde duas adde primas hac condicione;
Si digitus crescat ex addicione priorum,
Primo scribe loco digitum, quicunque sit ille;
Si sit compositus, in limite scribe sequenti
Articulum, primo digitum; quia sic iubet ordo.
Articulus si sit, in primo limite ci ram,
Articulum vero reliquis inscribe iguris;
Vel per se scribas si nulla igura sequatur.
Si tibi ci ra superueniens occurrerit, illam
Deme suppositam; post illic scribe iguram:
Postea procedas reliquas addendo iguras.

36

40

44

48

[Sidenote: Subtraction.]
A numero numerum si sit tibi demere cura,
Scribe igurarum series, vt in addicione;
Maiori numero numerum suppone minorem,
Siue pari numero supponatur numerus par.
Postea si possis a prima subtrahe primam,
Scribens quod remanet, ci ram si nil remanebit.
Set si non possis a prima demere primam;
Procedens, vnum de limite deme sequenti;
Et demptum pro denario reputabis ab illo,
Subtrahe totaliter numerum quem proposuisti.
Quo acto, scribe supra quicquit remanebit,
Facque novenarios de ci ris, cum remanebis,
Occurrant si orte ci re, dum demseris vnum;
Postea procedas reliquas demendo iguras.
[Sidenote: Proo .]

52

56

60

64

[{7}][Si subtracio sit bene acta probare valebis,

Quas subtraxisti primas addendo iguras.
Nam, subtractio si bene sit, primas retinebis,
Et subtractio acta tibi probat additionem.]

68

[Sidenote: Duplation.]
Si vis duplare numerum, sic incipe; solam
Scribe igurarum seriem, quamcumque voles que
Postea procedas primam duplando iguram;
Inde quod excrescet, scribens, vbi iusserit ordo,
Juxta precepta que dantur in addicione.
Nam si sit digitus, in primo limite scribe;
Articulus si sit, in primo limite ci ram,
Articulum vero reliquis inscribe iguris;
Vel per se scribas, si nulla igura sequatur:
Compositus si sit, in limite scribe sequenti
Articulum primo, digitum; quia sic jubet ordo:
Et sic de reliquis acias, si sint tibi plures.
[{8}][Si super extremam nota sit, monadem dat eidem,
Quod tibi contingit, si primo dimidiabis.]

72

76

80

[Sidenote: Mediation.]
Incipe sic, si vis aliquem numerum mediare:
Scribe igurarum seriem solam, velud ante;
Postea procedens medias, et prima igura
Si par aut impar videas; quia si uerit par,
Dimidiabis eam, scribens quicquit remanebit;
Impar si uerit, vnum demas, mediare,
Nonne presumas, sed quod superest mediabis;
Inde super tractum, ac demptum quod notat unum;
Si monos, dele; sit ibi ci ra post nota supra.
Postea procedas hac condicione secunda:[{9}]
Impar[{10}] si uerit hic vnum deme priori,
Inscribens quinque, nam denos signi icabit
Monos prdictam: si vero secunda dat vnam,
Illa deleta, scribatur ci ra; priori
Tradendo quinque pro denario mediato;
Nec ci ra scribatur, nisi inde igura sequatur:
Postea procedas reliquas mediando iguras,
Quin supra docui, si sint tibi mille igure.
[{11}][Si mediatio sit bene acta probare valebis,
Duplando numerum quem primo dimidiasti.]
Si super extremam nota sit monades dat eidem
Quod contingat cum primo dimiabis
Atque igura prior nuper uerit mediando.]

84

88

92

96

100

[Sidenote: Multiplication.]
Si tu per numerum numerum vis multiplicare,
Scribe duas, quascunque volis, series numerorum;
Ordo tamen seruetur vt vltima multiplicandi
Ponatur super anteriorem multiplicantis;
[{12}][A leua relique sint scripte multiplicantes.]
In digitum cures digitum si ducere, major
Per quantes distat a denis respice, debes
Namque suo decuplo tociens delere minorem;
Sicque tibi numerus veniens exinde patebit.
Postea procedas postremam multiplicando,

104

108

112

Juste multiplicans per cunctas in eriores,

Condicione tamen tali; quod multiplicantis
Scribas in capite, quicquid processerit inde;
Set postquam uerit hec multiplicata, igure
Anteriorentur seriei multiplicantis;
Et sic multiplica, velut istam multiplicasti,
Qui sequitur numerum scriptum quicunque iguris.
Set cum multiplicas, primo sic est operandum,
Si dabit articulum tibi multiplicacio solum;
Proposita ci ra, summam trans erre memento.
Sin autem digitus excrescerit articulusque,
Articulus supraposito digito salit ultra;
Si digitus tamen, ponas illum super ipsam,
Subdita multiplicans hanc que super incidit illi
Delet eam penitus, scribens quod provenit inde;
Sed si multiplices illam posite super ipsam,
Adiungens numerum quem prebet ductus earum;
Si supraimpositam ci ra debet multiplicare,
Prorsus eam delet, scribi que loco ci ra debet,
[{12}][Si ci ra multiplicat aliam positam super ipsam,
Sitque locus supra vacuus super hanc ci ra iet;]
Si supra uerit ci ra semper pretereunda est;
Si dubites, an sit bene multiplicando secunda,
Diuide totalem numerum per multiplicantem,
Et reddet numerus emergens inde priorem.

116

120

124

128

132

136

[Sidenote: Mental Multiplication.]

[{13}][Per numerum si vis numerum quoque multiplicare
Tantum per normas subtiles absque iguris
Has normas poteris per versus scire sequentes.
Si tu per digitum digitum quilibet multiplicabis
Regula precedens dat qualiter est operandum
Articulum si per reliquum vis multiplicare
In proprium digitum debebit uterque resolvi
Articulus digitos post per se multiplicantes
Ex digitis quociens teneret multiplicatum
Articuli aciunt tot centum multiplicati.
Articulum digito si multiplicamus oportet
Articulum digitum sumi quo multiplicare
Debemus reliquum quod multiplicaris ab illis
Per reliquo decuplum sic omne latere nequibit
In numerum mixtum digitum si ducere cures
Articulus mixti sumatur deinde resolvas
In digitum post hec ac ita de digitis nec
Articulusque docet excrescens in detinendo
In digitum mixti post ducas multiplicantem
De digitis ut norma docet sit juncta secundo
Multiplica summam et postea summa patebit
Junctus in articulum purum articulumque
[{14}][Articulum purum comittes articulum que]
Mixti pro digitis post iat et articulus vt
Norma jubet retinendo quod egreditur ab illis
Articuli digitum post in digitum mixti duc
Regula de digitis ut percipit articulusque
Ex quibus excrescens summe tu junge priori
Sic mani esta cito iet tibi summa petita.
Compositum numerum mixto sic multiplicabis
Vndecies tredecem sic est ex hiis operandum
In reliquum primum demum duc post in eundem

140

144

148

152

156

160

164

168

Unum post deinde duc in tercia deinde per unum

Multiplices tercia demum tunc omnia multiplicata
In summa duces quam que uerit te dices
Hic ut hic mixtus intentus est operandum
Multiplicandorum de normis su iciunt hec.]

172

[Sidenote: Division.]
Si vis dividere numerum, sic incipe primo;
Scribe duas, quascunque voles, series numerorum;
Majori numero numerum suppone minorem,
[{15}][Nam docet ut major teneat bis terve minorem;]
Et sub supprima supprimam pone iguram,
Sic reliquis reliquas a dextra parte locabis;
Postea de prima primam sub parte sinistra
Subtrahe, si possis, quociens potes adminus istud,
Scribens quod remanet sub tali conditione;
Ut totiens demas demendas a remanente,
Que serie recte ponentur in anteriori,
Unica si, tantum sit ibi decet operari;
Set si non possis a prima demere primam,
Procedas, et eam numero suppone sequenti;
Hanc uno retrahendo gradu quo comites retrahantur,
Et, quotiens poteris, ab eadem deme priorem,
Ut totiens demas demendas a remanenti,
Nec plus quam novies quicquam tibi demere debes,
Nascitur hinc numerus quociens supraque sequentem
Hunc primo scribas, retrahas exinde iguras,
Dum uerit major supra positus in eriori,
Et rursum iat divisio more priori;
Et numerum quotiens supra scribas pereunti,
Si iat saliens retrahendo, ci ra locetur,
Et pereat numero quotiens, proponas eidem
Ci ram, ne numerum pereat vis, dum locus illic
Restat, et expletis divisio non valet ultra:
Dum uerit numerus numerorum in eriore seorsum
Illum servabis; hinc multiplicando probabis,

176

180

184

188

192

196

200

[Sidenote: Proo .]
Si bene ecisti, divisor multiplicetur
Per numerum quotiens; cum multiplicaveris, adde
Totali summ, quod servatum uit ante,
Reddeturque tibi numerus quem proposuisti;
Et si nil remanet, hunc multiplicando reddet,

204

208

[Sidenote: Square Numbers.]

Cum ducis numerum per se, qui provenit inde
Sit tibi quadratus, ductus radix erit hujus,
Nec numeros omnes quadratos dicere debes,
Est autem omnis numerus radix alicujus.
Quando voles numeri radicem querere, scribi
Debet; inde notes si sit locus ulterius impar,
Estque igura loco talis scribenda sub illo,
Que, per se dicta, numerum tibi destruat illum,
Vel quantum poterit ex inde delebis eandem;
Vel retrahendo duples retrahens duplando sub ista
Que primo sequitur, duplicatur per duplacationem,
Post per se minuens pro posse quod est minuendum.

212

216

220

[{16}]Post his propones digitum, qui, more priori

Per precedentes, post per se multiplicatus,
Destruat in quantum poterit numerum remanentem,
Et sic procedens retrahens duplando iguram,
Preponendo novam donec totum peragatur,
Subdupla propriis servare docetque duplatis;
Si det compositum numerum duplacio, debet
Inscribi digitus a parte dextra parte propinqua,
Articulusque loco quo non duplicata resessit;
Si dabit articulum, sit ci ra loco pereunte
Articulusque locum tenet unum, de duplicata resessit;
Si donet digitum, sub prima pone sequente,
Si supraposita uerit duplicata igura
Major proponi debet tantummodo ci ra,
Has retrahens solito propones more iguram,
Usque sub extrema ita ac retrahendo iguras,
Si totum deles numerum quem proposuisti,
Quadratus uerit, de dupla quod duplicasti,
Sicque tibi radix illius certa patebit,
Si de duplatis it juncta supprima igura;
Radicem per se multiplices habeasque
Primo propositum, bene te ecisse probasti;
Non est quadratus, si quis restat, sed habentur
Radix quadrati qui stat major sub eadem;
Vel quicquid remanet tabula servare memento;
Hoc casu radix per se quoque multiplicetur,
Vel sic quadratus sub primo major habetur,
Hinc addas remanens, et prius debes haberi;
Si locus extremus uerit par, scribe iguram
Sub pereunte loco per quam debes operari,
Que quantum poterit supprimas destruat ambas,
Vel penitus legem teneas operando priorem,
Si suppositum digitus suo ine repertus,
Omnino delet illic scribi ci ra debet,
A leva si qua sit ei sociata igura;
Si ci re remanent in ine pares decet harum
Radices, numero mediam proponere partem,
Tali quesita radix patet arte reperta.
Per numerum recte si nosti multiplicare
Ejus quadratum, numerus qui pervenit inde
Dicetur cubicus; primus radix erit ejus;
Nec numeros omnes cubicatos dicere debes,
Est autem omnis numerus radix alicujus;

224

228

232

236

240

244

248

252

256

260

[Sidenote: Cube Root.]

Si curas cubici radicem qurere, primo
Inscriptum numerum distinguere per loca debes;
Que tibi mille notant a mille notante suprema
Initiam, summa operandi parte sinistra,
Illic sub scribas digitum, qui multiplicatus
In semet cubice suprapositum sibi perdat,
Et si quid uerit adjunctum parte sinistra
Si non omnino, quantum poteris minuendo,
Hinc triplans retrahe saltum, aciendo sub illa
Que manet a digito deleto terna, iguram
Illi propones quo sub triplo asocietur,
Ut cum subtriplo per eam tripla multiplicatur;
Hinc per eam solam productum multiplicabis,
Postea totalem numerum, qui provenit inde

264

268

272

276

A suprapositis respectu tolle triplate

Addita supprimo cubice tunc multiplicetur,
Respectu cujus, numerus qui progredietur
Ex cubito ductu, supra omnes adimetur;
Tunc ipsam delens triples saltum aciendo,
Semper sub ternas, retrahens alias triplicatas
Ex hinc triplatis aliam propone iguram,
Que per triplatas ducatur more priori;
Primo sub triplis sibi junctis, postea per se,
In numerum ducta, productum de triplicatis:
Utque prius dixi numerus qui provenit inde
A suprapositis has respiciendo trahatur,
Huic cubice ductum sub primo multiplicabis,
Respectumque sui, removebis de remanenti,
Et sic procedas retrahendo triplando iguram.
Et proponendo nonam, donec totum peragatur,
Subtripla sub propriis servare decet triplicatis;
Si nil in ine remanet, numerus datus ante
Est cubicus; cubicam radicem sub tripla prebent,
Cum digito juncto quem supprimo posuisti,
Hec cubice ducta, numerum reddant tibi primum.
Si quid erit remanens non est cubicus, sed habetur
Major sub primo qui stat radix cubicam,
Servari debet quicquid radice remansit,
Extracto numero, decet hec addi cubicato.
Quo acto, numerus reddi debet tibi primus.
Nam debes per se radicem multiplicare
Ex hinc in numerum duces, qui provenit inde
Sub primo cubicus major sic invenietur;
Illi jungatur remanens, et primus habetur,
Si per triplatum numerum nequeas operari;
Ci ram propones, nil vero per hanc operare
Set retrahens illam cum saltu deinde triplata,
Propones illi digitum sub lege priori,
Cumque ci ram retrahas saliendo, non triplicabis,
Namque nihil ci re triplacio dicitur esse;
At tu cum ci ram protraxeris aut triplicata,
Hanc cum subtriplo semper servare memento:
Si det compositum, digiti triplacio debet
Illius scribi, digitus saliendo sub ipsam;
Digito deleto, que terna dicitur esse;
Jungitur articulus cum triplata pereunte,
Set acit hunc scribi per se triplacio prima,
Que si det digitum per se scribi acit illum;
Consumpto numero, si sole uit tibi ci re
Triplato, propone ci ram saltum aciendo,
Cumque ci ram retrahe triplam, scribendo iguram,
Preponas ci re, sic procedens operare,
Si tres vel duo serie in sint, pone sub yma,
A dextris digitum servando prius documentum.
Si sit continua progressio terminus nuper
Per majus medium totalem multiplicato;
Si par, per medium tunc multiplicato sequentem.
Set si continua non sit progressio inis:
Impar, tunc majus medium si multiplicabis,
Si par per medium sibi multiplicato propinquum.
FOOTNOTES (Appendix II, Carmen de Algorismo):

280

284

288

292

296

300

304

308

312

316

320

324

328

332
333

[1: Hec prsens ars dicitur algorismus ab Algore rege ejus

inventore, vel dicitur ab _algos_ quod est ars, et _rodos_ quod est
numerus; qu est ars numerorum vel numerandi, ad quam artem bene
sciendum inveniebantur apud Indos bis quinque (id est decem)
igur. --_Comment. Thom de Novo-Mercatu._ MS. Bib. Reg. Mus.
Brit. 12 E. 1.]
[2: H necessari igur sunt Indorum characteros. _MS. de
numeratione._ Bib. Sloan. Mus. Brit. 513, ol. 58. Cum vidissem
Yndos constituisse IX literas in universo numero suo propter
dispositionem suam quam posuerunt, volui pate acere de opere quod
sit per eas aliquidque esset levius discentibus, si Deus voluerit.
Si autem Indi hoc voluerunt et intentio illorum nihil novem literis
uit, causa que mihi potuit. Deus direxit me ad hoc. Si vero alia
dicam preter eam quam ego exposui, hoc ecerunt per hoc quod ego
exposui, eadem tam certissime et absque ulla dubitatione poterit
inveniri. Levitasque patebit aspicientibus et discentibus. MS.
U.L.C., Ii. vi. 5, . 102.]
[3: From Eg. 2622.]
[4: 8 C. iv. inserts
Nullum cipa signi icat: dat signi icare sequenti.]
[5: From 12 E. 1.]
[6:
En argorisme devon prendre
Vii especes . . . .
Adision subtracion
Doubloison mediacion
Monteploie et division
Et de radix eustracion
A chez vii especes savoir
Doit chascun en memoire avoir
Letres qui igures sont dites
Et qui excellens sont ecrites. --MS. _Seld. Arch._ B. 26.]
[7: From 12 E. 1.]
[8: From 12 E. 1.]
[9: 8 C. iv. inserts
Atque igura prior nuper uerit mediando.]
[10: _I.e._ igura secundo loco posita.]
[11: So 12 E. 1; 8 C. iv. inserts-[12: 12 E. 1 inserts.]
[13: 12 E. 1 inserts to l. 174.]
[14: 12 E. 1 omits, Eg. 2622 inserts.]
[15: 12 E. 1 inserts.]
[16: 8 C. iv. inserts-Hinc illam dele duplans sub ei psalliendo
Que sequitur retrahens quicquid uerit duplicatum.]

INDEX OF TECHNICAL TERMS[1*]

[Footnote 1*: This Index has been kindly prepared by Pro essor
J. B. Dale, o Kings College, University o London, and the
best thanks o the Society are due to him or his valuable
contribution.]
[Transcribers Note:
The Technical Terms and Glossary ( ollowing) re er to page and line
numbers in the printed book. In ormation in [[double brackets]] has
been added by the transcriber to aid in text searching.]
+algorisme+, 33/12; +algorym+, +augrym+, 3/3; the art o computing,
using the so-called Arabic numerals.
The word in its various orms is derived rom the Arabic
_al-Khowarazmi_ (i.e. the native o Khwarazm (Khiva)). This was the
surname o Ja ar Mohammad ben Musa, who wrote a treatise early in
the 9th century (see p. xiv).
The orm _algorithm_ is also ound, being suggested by a supposed
derivation rom the Greek (numbe
).
+ante
y+, 24/11; to move fgu
es to the
ght of the poston n
whch they a
e f
st w
tten. Ths ope
aton s pe
fo
med
epeatedly
upon the multple
n multplcaton, and upon ce
tan fgu
es
whch a
se n the p
ocess of
oot ext
acton.
+ante
o
acoun+, 50/5; the ope
aton of movng fgu
es to the

ght. [[w
tten ante
o
ac{}o{u}n o
ante
o
aco{u}n]]
+a
tcle+, 34/23; +a
tcul+, 5/31; +a
tculs+, 9/36, 29/7,8;
a numbe
dvsble by ten wthout
emande
. [[also a
tcull{e}]]
+cast+, 8/12; to add one numbe
to anothe
.
Addton s a _castng_ togethe
of two numbe
s nto one numbe
,
8/10.
+cf
e+, 4/1; the name of the fgu
e 0. The wo
d s de
ved f
om the
A
abc _sf
_ = empty, nothng. Hence _ze
o_.
A cphe
s the symbol of the absence of numbe
o
of ze
o uantty.
It may be used alone o
n conjuncton wth dgts o
othe
cphe
s,
and n the latte
case, acco
dng to the poston whch t occupes

elatve to the othe
fgu
es, ndcates the absence of unts, o

tens, o
hund
eds, etc. The g
eat supe
o
ty of the A
abc to all
othe
systems of notaton
esdes n the employment of ths symbol.
When the cphe
s not used, the place value of dgts has to be
ndcated by w
tng them n assgned
ows o
columns. Cphe
s,
howeve
, may be nte
polated amongst the sgnfcant fgu
es used,
and as they suffcently ndcate the postons of the empty
ows o

columns, the latte
need not be ndcated n any othe
way. The
p
actcal pe
fo
mance of calculatons s thus eno
mously facltated
(see p. xv).
+componede+, 33/24; +composyt+, 5/35; wth
efe
ence to numbe
s, one
compounded of a multple of ten and a dgt.
[[w
tten componed{e}]]

+conue
tde+ = conve
sely, 46/29, 47/9.

[[w
tten co{n}u{e
}td{e} o
{con}u{e
}td{e}]]
+cubcede+, 50/13; +to be c.+, to have ts cube
oot found.
[[w
tten cubced{e}]]
+cubke nomb
e+, 47/8; a numbe
fo
med by multplyng a gven numbe

twce by tself, _e.g._ 27 = 3 3 3. Now called smply a cube.
[[w
tten cubk{e} ...]]
+decuple+, 22/12; the p
oduct of a numbe
by ten. Tenfold.
+depa
tys+ = dvdes, 5/29. [[w
tten dep{a
}tys]]
+dgt+, 5/30; +dgtalle+, 33/24; a numbe
less than ten,

ep
esented by one of the nne A
abc nume
als.
[[w
tten dgtall{e}]]
+dmydcon+, 7/23; the ope
aton of dvdng a numbe
by two.
Halvng. [[w
tten dmydco]]
+duccoun+, multplcaton, 43/9. [[w
tten ducco{u}n]]
+duplacon+, 7/23, 14/15; the ope
aton of multplyng a numbe
by
two. Doublng.
[[w
tten duplaco o
duplaco with ancy n]]
+i-mediet+ = halved, 19/23.
+intercise+ = broken, 46/2; intercise Progression is the name given
to either o the Progressions 1, 3, 5, 7, etc.; 2, 4, 6, 8, etc.,
in which the common di erence is 2. [[written int{er}cise]]
+lede into+, multiply by, 47/18.
[[words always separated, as lede ... into]]
+lyneal nombre+, 46/14; a number such as that which expresses the
measure o the length o a line, and there ore is not _necessarily_
the product o two or more numbers (_vide_ Super icial, Solid). This
appears to be the meaning o the phrase as used in _The Art o
Nombryng_. It is possible that the numbers so designated are the
prime numbers, that is, numbers not divisible by any other number
except themselves and unity, but it is not clear that this
limitation is intended.
+mediacioun+, 16/36, 38/16; dividing by two (see also +dimydicion+).
[[written mediacio with ancy n, generally without u]]
+medlede nombre+, 34/1; a number ormed o a multiple o ten and a
digit (_vide_ componede, composyt). [[written medled{e} ...]]
+medye+, 17/8, to halve; +mediete+, halved, 17/30; +ymedit+, 20/9.
+naturelle progressioun+, 45/22; the series o
[[written naturell{e} p{ro}gressio{u}n]]

numbers 1, 2, 3, etc.

+produccioun+, multiplication, 50/11. [[written produccio{u}n]]

+quadrat nombre+, 46/12; a number ormed by multiplying a given

number by itsel , _e.g._ 9 = 3 3, a square.

+rote+, 7/25; +roote+, 47/11; root. The roots o squares and cubes
are the numbers rom which the squares and cubes are derived by
multiplication into themselves.
+signi icaty +, signi icant, 5/14; The signi icant igures o a
number are, strictly speaking, those other than zero, _e.g._ in 3 6
5 0 4 0 0, the signi icant igures are 3, 6, 5, 4. Modern usage,
however, regards all igures between the two extreme signi icant
igures as signi icant, even when some are zero. Thus, in the above
example, 3 6 5 0 4 are considered signi icant.
+solide nombre+, 46/37; a number which is the product o three other
numbers, _e.g._ 66 = 11 2 3. [[usually written solid{e}]]
+super icial nombre+, 46/18; a number which is the product o
other numbers, _e.g._ 6 = 2 3.
[[written sup{er} icial or sup{er} iciall{e}]]

two

+ternary+, consisting o three digits, 51/7.

[[written t{er}nary]]
+vnder double+, a digit which has been doubled, 48/3.
+vnder-trebille+, a digit which has been trebled, 49/28;
+vnder-triplat+, 49/39.
[[written vnder-trebill{e}, vnder-t{r}iplat]]
+w+, a symbol used to denote hal a unit, 17/33
[[shown in e-text as superscript ]]

GLOSSARY
[Transcribers Note:
Words whose irst appearance is earlier than the page cited in the
Glossary are identi ied in double-bracketed notes. To aid in text
searching, words written with internal {italics} are also noted,
and context is given or common words.]
+ablacioun+, taking away, 36/21 [[written ablacio{u}n]]
+addyst+, haddest, 10/37
+agregacioun+, addition, 45/22. (First example in N.E.D., 1547.)
[[written ag{r}egacio{u}n]]
+a-enenes+, against, 23/10
+allgate+, always, 8/39
+als+, as, 22/24
+and+, i , 29/8;
+&+, 4/27;
+& y +, 20/7
+a-nendes+, towards, 23/15
+aproprede+, appropriated, 34/27 [[written ap{ro}pred{e}]]
+apwereth+, appears, 61/8
+a-risyt+, arises, 14/24
+a-rowe+, in a row, 29/10

+arsemetrike+, arithmetic, 33/1 [[written arsemetrik{e}]]

+ayene+, again, 45/15
+bagle+, crozier, 67/12
+bordure+ = ordure, row, 43/30 [[written bordur{e}]]
+borro+, _in ._ borrow, 11/38;
_imp. s._ +borowe+, 12/20;
_pp._ +borwed+, 12/15;
+borred+, 12/19
+boue+, above, 42/34
+caputule+, chapter, 7/26 [[written caputul{e}]]
+certayn+, assuredly, 18/34 [[written c{er}tay]]
+clepede+, called, 47/7 [[written cleped{e}]]
+competently+, conveniently, 35/8
+compt+, count, 47/29
+contynes+, contains, 21/12; [[written {con}tynes]]
_pp._ +contenythe+, 38/39 [[written co{n}tenyth{e}]]
+cra t+, art, 3/4
+distingue+, divide, 51/5
+egalle+, equal, 45/21 [[written egall{e}]]
+excep+, except, 5/16]
+exclusede+, excluded, 34/37 [[written exclused{e}]]
+excressent+, resulting, 35/16 [[written exc{re}ssent]]
+exeant+, resulting, 43/26
+expone+, expound, 3/23
+
+
+
+
+
+
+

erye+ = ere, ourth, 70/12

igure+ = igures, 5/1 [[written
or-by+, past, 12/11
ors; no .+, no matter, 22/24
orseth+, matters, 53/30
orye+ = ore, orth, 71/8]
y tye+ = y te, i th, 70/16

ig{ure}]]

+grewe+, Greek, 33/13

+haluendel+, hal , 16/16;
+haldel+, 19/4;
_pl._ +haluedels+, 16/16
+hayst+, hast, 17/3, 32
+hast+, haste, 22/25 [[in haue hast to]]
+heer+, higher, 9/35
+here+, their, 7/26 [[in in her{e} caputul{e}]]
+here-a- ore+, hereto ore, 13/7 [[written her{e}-a- or{e}]]
+heyth+, was called, 3/5
+hole+, whole, 4/39;
+holle+, 17/1;
+hoole+, o three dimensions, 46/15
+holdye+, holds good, 30/5
+how be it that+, although, 44/4
+lede+ = lete, let, 8/37
+lene+, lend, 12/39
+lest+, least, 43/27 [[in at the lest]]
+lest+ = le t, 71/9 [[in the lest syde]]
+leue+, leave, 6/5;
_pr. 3 s._ +leues+, remains, 11/19; [[ irst in 10/40]]

+leus+, 11/28;
_pp._ +la t+, le t, 19/24
+lewder+, more ignorant, 3/3 [[written lewd{er}]]
+lust+, desirest to, 45/13
+lyt+, easy, 15/31
+lymytes+, limits, 34/18;
+lynes+, 34/12;
+lynees+, 34/17;
Lat. limes, _pl._ limites.
+maystery+, achievement; [[written mayst{er}y]]
+no m.+, no achievement, i.e. easy, 19/10
+me+, _inde . pron._ one, 42/1 [[ irst in 34/16]]
+mo+, more, 9/16
+moder+ = more (Lat. majorem), 43/22
+most+, must, 30/3 [[ irst in 3/12 and many more]]
+multipliede+, +to be m.+ = multiplying, 40/9
+mynvtes+, the sixty parts into which a unit is divided, 38/25
[[written mynvt{es}]]
+myse-wrot+, mis-wrought, 14/11
+nether+, nor, 34/25 [[in It was, nether is]]
+nex+, next, 19/9
+not+, nought, 5/7 [[ irst in 4/8]]
+note+, not, 30/5
+oo+, one, 42/20; +o+, 42/21 [[ irst in 34/27; 33/22]]
+omest+, uppermost, higher, 35/26;
+omyst+, 35/28
+omwhile+, sometimes, 45/31 [[ irst in 39/17]]
+on+, one, 8/29 [[in on vnder an-o{er}]]
+opyne+, plain, 47/8 [[written opyn{e}]]
+or+, be ore, 13/25 [[in or ou be-gan]]
+or+ = e o{er}, the other, 28/34 [[in or by-twene]]
+ordure+, order, 34/9;
row, 43/1 [[word orm is order]]
+other+, or, 33/13, 43/26;
[[in art other cra t on 33/13, other how o t on 43/26;
note also one other other on 35/24]]
+other . . . or+, either . . . or, 38/37
[[in other it is even or od{e} on 38/37;
there are earlier occurrences]]
+ouerer+, upper, 42/15 [[written ou{er}er]]
+ouer-hippede+, passed over, 43/19 [[written ou{er}-hipped{e}]]
+recte+, directly, 27/20 [[in stondes not recte;
also on 26/31 in recte ou{er} his hede]]
+remayner+, remainder, 56/28
+representithe+, represented, 39/14 [[written rep{re}sentith{e}]]
+resteth+, remains, 63/29 [[ irst in 57/29 and others]]
+rewarde+, regard, 48/6 [[written reward{e}]]
+rew+, row, 4/8
+rewle+, row, 4/20, 7/12;
[[in place o e rewle, e rewle o ig{ure}s]]
+rewele+, 4/18;
+rewles+, rules, 5/33
+s.+ = scilicet, 3/8 [[in s. Algorism{us}]]
+sentens+, meaning, 14/29
+signi ye(ty )+, 5/13. The last three letters are added above the

line, evidently because o the word signi icaty in l. 14.

But the Solucio, which contained the word, has been omitted.
+sithen+, since, 33/8
+some+, sum, result, 40/17, 32
[[ irst in 36/21 in me may see a some, then in the same some
and to some o ]]
+sowne+, pronounce, 6/29
+singillatim+, singly, 7/25
+spices+, species, kinds, 34/4 [[ irst in 5/34 and others]]
+spyl+, waste, 14/26
+styde+, stead, 18/20
+subtrahe+, subtract, 48/12;
_pp._ +subtrayd+, 13/21
+sythes+, times, 21/16
+tat+, taught, 16/36
+take+, _pp._ taken;
+t. ro+, starting rom, 45/22 [[in ro oone or tweyn{e} take]]
+taward+, toward, 23/34
+thout+, though, 5/20
+trebille+, multiply by three, 49/26 [[written trebill{e}]]
+twene+, two, 8/11 [[ irst in 4/23]]
+ow+, though, 25/15 [[in ow {o}u take]]
+owt+, thought;
+be .+, mentally, 28/4
+us+ = is, this, 20/33 [[in us nombur 214]]
+vny+, unite, 45/10
+wel+, wilt, 14/31 [[in I {o}u wel]]
+wete+, wit, 15/16;
+wyte+, know, 8/38;
_pr. 2 s._ +wost+, 12/38
+wex+, become, 50/18
+where+, whether, 29/12
[[written wher{e} in wher{e} in e secunde, or]]
+wher-thurghe+, whence, 49/15 [[written Wher-thurgh{e}]]
+worch+, work, 8/19; [[ irst in 7/35]]
+wrich+, 8/35;
+wyrch+, 6/19;
_imp. s._ +worch+, 15/9; [[ irst in 9/6]]
_pp._ +y-wroth+, 13/24
+write+, written, 29/19;
[[ irst in 6/37 in hast write, be write]]
+y-write+, 16/1
+wryrchynge+ = wyrchynge, working, 30/4 [[written wryrchyng{e}]]
+w^t+, with, 55/8
+y-broth+, brought, 21/18
+ychon+, each one, 29/10 [[written ycho]]
+ydo+, done, added, 9/6
[[ irst in 8/37 in haue ydo; 9/6 in ydo all to-ged{er}]]
+ylke+, same, 5/12
+y-lyech+, alike, 22/23
+y-myt+, been able, 12/2
+y-nowt+, enough, 15/31;
+ynovt+, 18/34
+yove+, given, 45/33
+y^t+, that, 52/8
+y-write+, _v._ +write.+

+y-wroth+, _v._ +worch.+

*

*
*

*
*

*
*

*
*

MARGINAL NOTES:
+Headnotes+ have been moved to the beginning o the appropriate
paragraph. Headnotes were omitted rom the two Appendixes, as sidenotes
give the same in ormation.
+Line Numbers+ are cited in the Index and Glossary. They have been
omitted rom the e-text except in the one verse selection (App. II,
_Carmen de Algorismo_). Instead, the Index and Glossary include
supplemental in ormation to help locate each word.
+Numbered Notes+:
Numbered sidenotes show page or lea numbers rom the original MSS.
In the e-text, the page number is shown as [*123b] inline; mid-word
page breaks are marked with a supplemental asterisk [*]. Numbers are
not used.
Footnotes give textual in ormation such as variant readings. They
have been numbered sequentially within each title, with numbers
shown as [{1}] to avoid con usion with bracked text--including
single numerals--in the original. Editorial notes are shown as [1*].
When a ootnote calls or added text, the addition is shown in the
body text with [[double brackets]].
+Sidenotes+ giving a running synopsis o the text have been moved to the
beginning o each paragraph, where they are shown as a single note.
ERRORS AND ANOMALIES (Noted by Transcriber):
Introduction:
dated Mij^c
[_In this and the remainder o the paragraph, the letter shown as
^c is printed directly above the preceding j._]
The Cra te o Nombrynge:
sursu{m} {pr}ocedas m{u}ltiplicando
[_Italicized as shown: error or p{ro}cedas?_]
Sidenote: Our author makes a slip here
[_Elsewhere in the book, numerical errors are corrected in the
body text, with a ootnote giving the original orm._]
ten tymes so mych is e nounb{re}
[_text unchanged: error or as?_]
6 tymes 24, [{19}]en take
[_misplaced ootnote anchor in original:
belongs with 6 times 24_]
Fn. 7: Subt{ra}has a{u}t addis a dext{ri}s [_open quote missing_]
The Art o

Nombryng:

oone o the digitis as .10. o 1.. 20. o . 2.

[_text unchanged: error or as .10. o .1. 20. o .2.?_]
sette a-side hal o tho m{inutes}
[_text unchanged: error or the?_]
and. 10. as be ore is come thero
[_text unchanged: error or and .10.?_]
Sidenote: Where to set the quotiente [_spelling (1922) unchanged_]
Sidenote: De inition o Progression. [_ in o illegible_]
Sidenote: ... giving the value o ab.^2 [_That is, a(b^2)._]
Accomptynge by counters:
For example o the [*117a.] ly[*]nes
[_ inal . in sidenote missing or invisible_]
[_also in 121b, 122a]
which in the yrst summe is 5
[_invisible 5 supplied by transcriber_]
[*116a (_sic_).]
[_Editors sic: page numbering jumps back to 116 instead o the
expected 123, and continues rom 116._]
[*123a] ... set downe y^e multiplyer .v. tymes, as here you se
[_Diagram shown as printed, with 35500 or 36500 in one column,
and apparent misplaced thousands marker_]
365 (which is the nomber o dayes ... [_open ( missing_]
The arte o nombrynge by the hande:
or 1 the ynger is clasped in
[_In at least one printing o the text, clasped is misprinted
as elasped_]
but this teacyed me not [_text unchanged_]
Appendix I: A Treatise on the Numeration o
_See Introduction and Glossary

Algorism:

or : and :y errors_

Appendix II: Carmen de Algorismo:

_In this selection, errors that are not explained in
assumed to be typographic._

ootnotes were

l. 99 Postea procedas [procdeas]

l. 163 Articuli digitum post in digitum mixti duc [post iu]

End o Project Gutenbergs The Earliest Arithmetics in English, by Anonymous

*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE EARLIEST ARITHMETICS IN ENGLISH ***
***** This ile should be named 25664-0.txt or 25664-0.zip *****
This and all associated iles o various ormats will be ound in:
http://www.gutenberg.org/2/5/6/6/25664/
Produced by Louise Hope, David Starner and the Online
Distributed Proo reading Team at http://www.pgdp.net

Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions

will be renamed.
Creating the works rom public domain print editions means that no
one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
set orth in the General Terms o Use part o this license, apply to
copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project
Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used i you
charge or the eBooks, unless you receive speci ic permission. I you
do not charge anything or copies o this eBook, complying with the
rules is very easy. You may use this eBook or nearly any purpose
such as creation o derivative works, reports, per ormances and
research. They may be modi ied and printed and given away--you may do
practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is
subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
redistribution.

*** START: FULL LICENSE ***

THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission o promoting the ree
distribution o electronic works, by using or distributing this work
(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms o the Full Project
Gutenberg-tm License (available with this ile or online at
http://gutenberg.org/license).
Section 1. General Terms o
electronic works

Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm

1.A. By reading or using any part o this Project Gutenberg-tm

electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
and accept all the terms o this license and intellectual property
(trademark/copyright) agreement. I you do not agree to abide by all
the terms o this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
all copies o Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
I you paid a ee or obtaining a copy o or access to a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
terms o this agreement, you may obtain a re und rom the person or
entity to whom you paid the ee as set orth in paragraph 1.E.8.
1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
agree to be bound by the terms o this agreement. There are a ew
things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
even without complying with the ull terms o this agreement. See
paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot o things you can do with Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works i you ollow the terms o this agreement
and help preserve ree uture access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works. See paragraph 1.E below.

1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"

or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection o Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
collection are in the public domain in the United States. I an
individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you rom
copying, distributing, per orming, displaying or creating derivative
works based on the work as long as all re erences to Project Gutenberg
are removed. O course, we hope that you will support the Project
Gutenberg-tm mission o promoting ree access to electronic works by
reely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms o
this agreement or keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
the work. You can easily comply with the terms o this agreement by
keeping this work in the same ormat with its attached ull Project
Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
1.D. The copyright laws o the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in
a constant state o change. I you are outside the United States, check
the laws o your country in addition to the terms o this agreement
be ore downloading, copying, displaying, per orming, distributing or
creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning
the copyright status o any work in any country outside the United
States.
1.E. Unless you have removed all re erences to Project Gutenberg:
1.E.1. The ollowing sentence, with active links to,
access to, the ull Project Gutenberg-tm License must
whenever any copy o a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any
phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the
Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, per
copied or distributed:

or other immediate
appear prominently
work on which the
phrase "Project
ormed, viewed,

This eBook is or the use o anyone anywhere at no cost and with

almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
re-use it under the terms o the Project Gutenberg License included
with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
1.E.2. I an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
rom the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
posted with permission o the copyright holder), the work can be copied
and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any ees
or charges. I you are redistributing or providing access to a work
with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
work, you must comply either with the requirements o paragraphs 1.E.1
through 1.E.7 or obtain permission or the use o the work and the
Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set orth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
1.E.9.
1.E.3. I an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
with the permission o the copyright holder, your use and distribution
must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked
to the Project Gutenberg-tm License or all works posted with the
permission o the copyright holder ound at the beginning o this work.
1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the ull Project Gutenberg-tm

License terms rom this work, or any iles containing a part o this
work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
1.E.5. Do not copy, display, per orm, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part o this electronic work, without
prominently displaying the sentence set orth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
active links or immediate access to the ull terms o the Project
Gutenberg-tm License.
1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary orm, including any
word processing or hypertext orm. However, i you provide access to or
distribute copies o a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a ormat other than
"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other ormat used in the o icial version
posted on the o icial Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
you must, at no additional cost, ee or expense to the user, provide a
copy, a means o exporting a copy, or a means o obtaining a copy upon
request, o the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
orm. Any alternate ormat must include the ull Project Gutenberg-tm
License as speci ied in paragraph 1.E.1.
1.E.7. Do not charge a ee or access to, viewing, displaying,
per orming, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable ee or copies o or providing
access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
that
- You pay a royalty ee o 20% o the gross pro its you derive rom
the use o Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The ee is
owed to the owner o the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments
must be paid within 60 days ollowing each date on which you
prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
address speci ied in Section 4, "In ormation about donations to
the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
- You provide a ull re und o any money paid by a user who noti ies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days o receipt that s/he
does not agree to the terms o the ull Project Gutenberg-tm
License. You must require such a user to return or
destroy all copies o the works possessed in a physical medium
and discontinue all use o and all access to other copies o
Project Gutenberg-tm works.
- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a ull re und o any
money paid or a work or a replacement copy, i a de ect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
o receipt o the work.
- You comply with all other terms o this agreement or ree
distribution o Project Gutenberg-tm works.
1.E.9. I you wish to charge a ee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic work or group o works on di erent terms than are set

orth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing rom

both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
Hart, the owner o the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the
Foundation as set orth in Section 3 below.
1.F.
1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
e ort to identi y, do copyright research on, transcribe and proo read
public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
collection. Despite these e orts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
"De ects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
property in ringement, a de ective or damaged disk or other medium, a
computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
your equipment.
1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except or the "Right
o Replacement or Re und" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner o the Project
Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
liability to you or damages, costs and expenses, including legal
ees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - I you discover a
de ect in this electronic work within 90 days o receiving it, you can
receive a re und o the money (i any) you paid or it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work rom. I you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with
the de ective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu o a
re und. I you received the work electronically, the person or entity
providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
receive the work electronically in lieu o a re und. I the second copy
is also de ective, you may demand a re und in writing without urther
opportunities to ix the problem.
1.F.4. Except or the limited right o replacement or re und set orth
in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you AS-IS WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers o certain implied
warranties or the exclusion or limitation o certain types o damages.
I any disclaimer or limitation set orth in this agreement violates the
law o the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
the applicable state law. The invalidity or unen orceability o any
provision o this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemni y and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee o the Foundation, anyone

providing copies o Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance

with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
promotion and distribution o Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
harmless rom all liability, costs and expenses, including legal ees,
that arise directly or indirectly rom any o the ollowing which you do
or cause to occur: (a) distribution o this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
work, (b) alteration, modi ication, or additions or deletions to any
Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any De ect you cause.
Section 2. In ormation about the Mission o Project Gutenberg-tm
Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the ree distribution o
electronic works in ormats readable by the widest variety o computers
including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists
because o the e orts o hundreds o volunteers and donations rom
people in all walks o li e.
Volunteers and inancial support to provide volunteers with the
assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tms
goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
remain reely available or generations to come. In 2001, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
and permanent uture or Project Gutenberg-tm and uture generations.
To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
and how your e orts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
and the Foundation web page at http://www.pgla .org.
Section 3. In ormation about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation
The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non pro it
501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws o the
state o Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
Revenue Service. The Foundations EIN or ederal tax identi ication
number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
http://pgla .org/ undraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the ull extent
permitted by U.S. ederal laws and your states laws.
The Foundations principal o ice is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
throughout numerous locations. Its business o ice is located at
809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
business@pgla .org. Email contact links and up to date contact
in ormation can be ound at the Foundations web site and o icial
page at http://pgla .org
For additional contact in ormation:
Dr. Gregory B. Newby
Chie Executive and Director
gbnewby@pgla .org
Section 4. In ormation about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation
Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
spread public support and donations to carry out its mission o

increasing the number o public domain and licensed works that can be
reely distributed in machine readable orm accessible by the widest
array o equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
status with the IRS.
The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states o the United
States. Compliance requirements are not uni orm and it takes a
considerable e ort, much paperwork and many ees to meet and keep up
with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
where we have not received written con irmation o compliance. To
SEND DONATIONS or determine the status o compliance or any
particular state visit http://pgla .org
While we cannot and do not solicit contributions rom states where we
have not met the solicitation requirements, we know o no prohibition
against accepting unsolicited donations rom donors in such states who
approach us with o ers to donate.
International donations are grate ully accepted, but we cannot make
any statements concerning tax treatment o donations received rom
outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small sta .
Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages or current donation
methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number o other
ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
To donate, please visit: http://pgla .org/donate
Section 5. General In ormation About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works.
Pro essor Michael S. Hart is the originator o the Project Gutenberg-tm
concept o a library o electronic works that could be reely shared
with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network o volunteer support.
Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are o ten created rom several printed
editions, all o which are con irmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily
keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search acility:
http://www.gutenberg.org
This Web site includes in ormation about Project Gutenberg-tm,
including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.